Translation of the original instructions

UNImix B 76

These instructions must be issued to the persons carrying out the tasks described herein. Unless
they are accessible to such persons at all times, these instructions cannot fulfil their purpose.

Rieter Textile Systems

Klosterstrasse 20, 8406 Winterthur

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76

Copyright Rieter. No part of these instructions or any attachment provided to the recipient may be copied or
made available to a third party without prior written permission of this company.

Rieter Textile Systems

Klosterstrasse 20
8406 Winterthur
Tel. +41 52 208 71 71
Fax +41 52 208 83 20
E-mail service_sys@rieter.com

UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

 Preface

Preface

The information contained in these instructions is intended to assist the smooth, trouble-free running of the
machine and the safety of operators and maintenance personnel.
The instructions contain important notes on how to operate the machine safely, properly and efficiently. By
observing these instructions you can help prevent danger, reduce repair costs and downtimes, as well as in-
creasing the reliability and lengthening the service life of the machine.
The operating instructions must be permanently available at the place where the machine is located.
The instructions must be read and followed by everyone who is assigned to work on the machine.
The instructions correspond to the technical state of the art at the time of going to press.Rieter reserves the
right to carry out modifications.
Inquiries concerning Service information should be addressed to the Service Centre responsible for your re-
gion.
The instructions must be completed as necessary by adding directions based on existing national regulations
for the prevention of accidents and the protection of the environment.

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76

Preface

UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

 General Part 1
B 76

Operation Part 2

Setting up, preparing, adjusting Part 3

Maintenance Part 4

Troubleshooting Part 5

Description of machine subassemblies Part 6

Keyword index Part 7

Appendix Part 8
20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 10839562
UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1
Contents
Part / Page

General
1 How to use the operating instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 1
2 Legal stipulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 7
3 General notes on safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 9
4 Machine identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 21
5 Machine description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 23
6 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 25
7 Putting into operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 33
8 Instruction of personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 35

Operation
1 Controls and display elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 1
2 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 21
3 Display screens Operator panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 51

Setting up, preparing, adjusting

1 Explanation on this section of the operating instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 1
2 Machine set up; optimise settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 3

Maintenance
1 Overview of special tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 1
2 Safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 3
3 Explanations for maintenance and intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 5
4 Maintenance schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 7
5 Cleaning / Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 11
6 Lubricant Manufacturer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 21
7 Standard lubricant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 23
8 Lubrication points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 25

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 0/1

 Part / Page

Troubleshooting
1 Explanation on this section of the operating instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 / 1
2 Operator interface panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 / 3
3 Error not displayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 / 19

Description of machine subassemblies

1 Explanation on this section of the operating instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 1
2 Safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 3
3 Overview of special tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 5
4 UNImix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 7
5 Lower blend module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 13
6 Upper blend module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 23
7 Delivery section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 29
8 Control technique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 77
9 Operating and display elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 97
10 Torque standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 101

0/2 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Part 1

General

Part / Page

1 How to use the operating instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 1

2 Legal stipulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 7

3 General notes on safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 9

4 Machine identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 21

5 Machine description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 23

6 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 25

7 Putting into operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 33

8 Instruction of personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 35

No. of pages 38

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 1/I

General
1 / II UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1
General
Contents

Part / Page

1 How to use the operating instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 1

1.1 Structure of the operating instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 1
1.2 Symbols in the document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 3

2 Legal stipulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 7
2.1 Liability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 7

3 General notes on safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 9

3.1 Safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 9
3.2 Safety devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 14
3.2.1 Secure the ladder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 14
3.2.2 Secured doors and covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 15
3.2.3 Bolted or non-fused covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 16
3.2.4 Warning sign . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 17
3.2.5 Covers for the openings near the spiked lattice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 18
3.2.6 Controls with safety function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 18
3.3 Responsibilities and qualifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 19

4 Machine identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 21
4.1 CE nameplate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 21

5 Machine description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 23
5.1 Overview of subassemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 23

6 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 25
6.1 Performance characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 25
6.2 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 27
6.2.1 Space requirements for the B 76 and B 76 R/S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 27
6.3 Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 28
6.4 Floor condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 29
6.5 Machinery requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 30
6.5.1 Air ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 30
6.5.2 Electrical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 31
6.6 Emissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 31
6.6.1 Statement of Noise Emission pursuant to ISO 4871 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 31

7 Putting into operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 33

7.1 Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 33
7.2 Decommissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 33
7.3 Putting back into operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 33
7.4 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 33

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 1 / III

General
 Part / Page

8 Instruction of personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 35

1 / IV UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

General
 How to use the operating instructions

1 How to use the operating instructions

1.1 Structure of the operating instructions
Structure of the operating instructions

0 Preface, Register, Table of contents of file 5 Part 5: Troubleshooting

The operating instructions are divided into The information provided in this part is inten-
parts. ded to assist in finding and eliminating the
Each part deals with specific subjects and is cause in the event of a malfunction (malfunc-
intended for particular users. tions, warnings, messages).

1 Part 1: General 6 Part 6: Description of machine subassem-

General information, information about plan- blies
ning installations. This section lists the following task descrip-
tions arranged by subassembly: Settings,
2 Part 2: Operation checking and installation/dismantling tasks.
Contains all the information with which the All job descriptions for a subassembly and
operator must be familiar in order to operate the necessary information concerning the
the product safely. function of a subassembly are grouped to-
3 Part 3: Setting up, preparing, adjusting gether in sections.
Contains information about setting up the 7 Part 7: Keyword index
plant to meet the specific requirements and
adapting it to the environment, especially as 8 Part 8: Appendix
regards the material to be processed, and
optimizing quality and productivity.
4 Part 4: Maintenance
Contains all necessary information about the
internal planning of maintenance work This
part contains detailed instructions for cleaning
and lubrication
For more details about maintenance work
such as changing wearing parts, checks and
settings, please see cross-reference to the
description in Part 6.

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 1/1

General
How to use the operating instructions

Example of a page with orientation elements

1 Description of a section

2 Cross-reference indicating page

3 Date of publication, language and version of

document

4 Machine type and name of part

5 Part / Page

1/2 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

General
 How to use the operating instructions

1.2 Symbols in the document

Example of a note on safety
It is absolutely essential to observe the safety pre-
cautions.
Safety precautions are classified and highlighted by
signal words.
The example shows a safety precaution indicated
by the signal word "Danger".
DANGER
Maximum danger level. This is used in the case of
risks where there are very far-reaching
consequences, with fatal injuries, irreversible or
incurable injuries and very serious but curable
injuries "DANGER" is only used when damage is
highly likely to occur due to improper behavior
1 Signal word
"Danger", "Warning", "Caution", "Important" WARNING
classify the safety precautions. Second highest level of danger used for risks
2 Risk where there are far-reaching consequences, the
Description of the risk situation The potential same as at maximum danger level.. Unlike
consequences of the damage are also de- maximum level, "WARNING" is used where the
scribed. The description of the risk involved is probability of damage occurring in the case of
emphasized by a symbol. improper behavior is only slight.
3 Directions for avoiding danger
CAUTION
Description of what needs to be done or Moderate level of danger is used in the case of
avoided in order to prevent accidents and risks where the consequences are less serious,
damage occurring. The direction for avoiding completely curable injuries to only slight injuries
danger can be emphasized by a command or with short absence from work. Also used
prohibition symbol. for damage to property with far-reaching
consequences.

IMPORTANT
Low level of danger is used when there is a risk of
slight damage to property.

Danger symbols

Risk of falling

General hazard area

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 1/3

General
How to use the operating instructions

Suspended load

Risk of injury

Risk of injury due to part of the body being pulled in

Risk of injury due to being pulled in

Hazardous voltage

Electric shock from capacitor

Hazard due to automatic start-up

Laser beam

Prevention symbols

Use eye protection

1/4 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

General
 How to use the operating instructions

Wear protective footwear

No admittance

Shut down power before working on the installation.

Switch off via the main switch and secure switch with a padlock

Press EMERGENCY STOP button

Do not touch

Symbols in the document

The page indicated refers to the currently selected chapter.

More information on this subject can be found on the page indicated

Incorrect application, not permissible

Correct application, OK

Outcome. For example, after an operation step

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 1/5

General
How to use the operating instructions

1/6 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

General
 Legal stipulations

2 Legal stipulations
2.1 Liability
If, contrary to regulations, the assembly of new or existing plant is carried out by a third party, RIETER MA-
CHINE WORKS LTD. declines all liability.
The auxiliary agents supplied by Rieter such as crane, roll lifter etc.must be used only at the places and on
the types of machine intended and for no other purpose .RIETER MACHINE WORKS LTD. declines all re-
sponsibility for any damage due to inappropriate usage of the auxiliary agents
If the machine is used for any purpose other than that for which it is intended, RIETER MACHINE WORKS
LTD. declines all liability.

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 1/7

General
Legal stipulations

1/8 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

General
 General notes on safety

3 General notes on safety

3.1 Safety precautions
Intended use
This machine is intended solely for the processing of cotton and 100% man-made fibres, along with blends of
such materials.
See “Raw materials for processing” in the “Technical data” chapter.
Only closed rooms with suitable air-conditioning for spinning technology are to be used for machine opera-
tion.
The machine is to be used only as intended.
Operate the machine only according to this operating manual.
Any use beyond the intended purpose is regarded as improper use, in particular using materials hazardous to
health, such as asbestos, glass, etc.

Technical state
If the machine is operated while in a defective state, safety, proper functioning and availability will be com-
promised.
Operate the machine only while it is in a technically fault-free state.
Comply with the maintenance schedule.
Use only original spare parts (indicated in the spare parts catalogue).
If the operating behaviour of the machine changes, check the machine for faults.
Remedy the faults immediately.
Do not make unauthorised modifications or changes to the machine.

Availability of the operating manual

The operating manual must be available to the per-
sonnel involved.
Personnel must have read and understood the op-
erating manual, prior to commencing work.

Safe practice
For reasons of operability, it is not possible to completely eliminate all sources of danger.
“Overestimation of one’s capabilities” is a major source of danger.
Even routine tasks require full attention at all times.

Qualification of personnel
Unqualified personnel cannot recognise risks and are therefore exposed to dangers.
Only technically qualified personnel are to be assigned tasks at the machine (described in this operating
manual).
Installation, operating, maintenance and service personnel must have been trained.
Have the operating authority ensure that personnel comply with the locally applicable rules and regulations for
safe and hazard-conscious work.

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 1/9

General
General notes on safety

Have the operating authority specify and make known the responsibilities for tasks. Keys and passwords are
to be given to assigned personnel only.
Qualification of different types of personnel:
Maintenance technician: On account of their vocational education and training by the manufacturer of the ma-
chine, as well as the job assigned to them, maintenance technicians are in a position to recognise hazards or
residual risks that exist during maintenance of the machine, and to take appropriate measures.
Operator: After being trained by the manufacturer or the operating authority, operators are in a position to re-
cognise hazards or residual risks that exist during operation of the machine, in order to guarantee the safe op-
eration of the machine.
Electrical technician: Maintenance work involving the electrical equipment may only be carried out by elec-
trical technicians (electricians, master electricians, electromechanical technicians, mechatronics technicians,
electrical engineering technicians, electrical engineers).

Access to the machines

Only trained and authorised personnel are to have
access to the machines.

Personal protective equipment

Ear protection:
During operation, high levels of airborne noise are emitted at the machine, which can result in hearing dam-
age.
Use ear protection in accordance with EN 352.
Safety shoes:
At the machine, there is a risk of injury to the feet due to falling objects.
Wear safety shoes in accordance with EN ISO 20345 (category S3).
Safety gloves for oils and antifreeze agents:
There is a risk of injury to the hands when handling oils and antifreeze agents.
Wear nitrile safety gloves in accordance with EN 374.
Thermal-protection gloves:
Surfaces at the machine can become hot.
Wear thermal-protection gloves in accordance with EN ISO 11611.
Safety glasses:
When using compressed air during cleaning tasks, there is a risk of eye injury.
Wear safety glasses at all times.
When carrying out grinding work for maintenance purposes, there is a risk of eye injury.
Wear safety glasses at all times.

Clothing
Use of appropriate clothing minimises the risk of accident.
Do not wear loose clothing (such as scarves, ties, clothing with wide open sleeves, etc.).
Cover hair if it is long. Wear a cap or a hairnet at all times.

1 / 10 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

General
 General notes on safety

Do not wear rings on fingers or wristwatches.

Protection against inadvertent start-up

If the machine starts up inadvertently, persons working at the machine can be seriously injured as a result.
Set the main switch or the safety switch to the “0” position and attach a lock to the switch.
Remove the key and keep it on your person.

Protective devices
The safety of persons will be compromised if protective devices do not function effectively.
Prior to operating the machine, ensure that all protective devices are functioning effectively.
Do not remove tightly screwed-on covers, viewing windows and pipes unless the machine is in a safe operat-
ing state.
Safe operating state:
The main switch or the safety switch is in the “off” position and secured with a lock. There must be no active
machine processes.

Work on electrical equipment

With the machine at a standstill, set the main switch or the safety switch to the “off” position and secure the
switch with a lock.
Only electrical technicians are permitted to work at the machine with the main switch in the “on” position (for
measurement and testing purposes).
To guarantee a correct operation sequence, do not manually actuate the sensors in normal mode.

External voltage
Certain circuits may still be live even with the main
switch or safety switch in the “off” position.
These circuits are marked at the terminals (see dia-
gram).
Particular care and attention is required in this
area.

Supply line
The supply line to the main switch remains live,
even if the main switch is in the “off” position.
The terminals of the supply line are marked (see
diagram).
Particular care and attention is required in this
area.

Discharge duration for frequency converters

When carrying out maintenance tasks at frequency converters, comply with the 10-minute wait requirement
for discharge.

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 1 / 11

General
General notes on safety

STO devices
STO stands for “safe torque off” and refers to safe stopping.
The guarantee of safety for STO devices expires after 15 years. The operating authority is responsible for re-
placing STO devices, whenever the respective guarantees of safety expire.
Safety circuit:
No modifications are permissible at the safety circuit. Safety-related components must not be removed or
bridged.
Repair work at the safety circuit may only be carried out by qualified technicians. After finishing repair work at
the safety circuit of at safety-related components, a test of the functioning of the safety circuit and the safety
functions has to be performed for the entire machine. The function test procedure has to be set down in writ-
ing.
Safety-related components:
Safety circuit, cable harness, wiring, EMERGENCY STOP button, pull-wire, STO devices and other safety-
related components of the machine
STO devices may only be repaired by a certified competent body such as “RIETER-ELO Service”.

Safe work environment

Risk of slipping and tripping:
Slippery surfaces and trip hazards can lead to serious accidents.
Keep aisles, handles, steps, ladders, platforms and railings free of grease, oil and other soilings.
Do not use the machine as a climbing aid or as a means of support. Use only the steps and platforms
provided.
Wear anti-slip safety shoes.

Safety markings
The safety of persons will be compromised if safety markings are not discernible.
Replace markings that are not discernible.
Do not remove or cover safety markings.

Auxiliary aids and tools

Auxiliary aids such as ladders, lifting devices, etc. must be in perfect condition.
Tools and other auxiliary aids must not be deposited on machines that are running.
When using chemicals such as solvents, observe the instructions of the manufacturer.

Max. weight for manual handling

A max. weight of 25 kg for regular handling is specified in EN 1005-2.
If the weight of a subassembly exceeds 25 kg, use two persons or lifting equipment for handling purposes

Work at buildings and installations

If, for example, work is to be carried out above the machine, ensure that the machine is stopped beforehand.

1 / 12 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

General
 General notes on safety

Fire protection

With textile processes, fires can occur.

Ignition of fibres, fly or fibre dust, contact between cotton and heated bearings, sparks flying from metallic im-
purities and electrically-generated sparks can all lead to fires.
Provide manually-operated extinguishing systems, etc. for fire-fighting purposes.
Instruct personnel in the correct handling of extinguishing systems, use of escape routes, etc.
Determine the extinguishing systems to use in consultation with the local fire-protection authorities.

Disposal
If the machine is to be shut down for good, the legal requirements for re-use and recycling which hold in the
respective country are to be complied with.
The operating authority is responsible for the proper disposal of operating media, such as oils, greases and
batteries.

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 1 / 13

General
General notes on safety

3.2 Safety devices

3.2.1 Secure the ladder
DANGER
Entry to the hazard zone is strictly forbidden!

If working on the UNImix using the accompanying or another ladder, the ladder must be secured using a
safety lanyard. When this is done the ladder is prevented from accidentally tipping over. Do not step onto the
machine.

1 Safety lanyard
2 Ladder

1 / 14 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

General
 General notes on safety

3.2.2 Secured doors and covers

The two front covers at the bottom are secured with safety switches and each is identified by a red ring at-
tached to the bolt. If such a cover is opened, the machine will be deactivated. The door at the cleaning port
for accessing the interior space is secured with a limit switch. When the door is open, the machine is secured
against starting.

2 5

3
1

1 Doors, left-hand side 4 Red ring

2 Doors, right-hand side 5 Safety switch
3 Cleaning port

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 1 / 15

General
General notes on safety

3.2.3 Bolted or non-fused covers

WARNING
Set the main switch to the “off” position and secure it with a lock.

WARNING
Moving machine parts.
The machine may only be put into operation, if all the covers are fitted.

Tightly screwed-on covers and windows may only be removed if the main switch is set to the “off” position
and secured. The covers prevent persons inadvertently reaching inside the drive units. If such covers are re-
moved for servicing work, then they have to be refitted immediately upon completion of the work. The safety
screws (6) for the windows (2 to 5) can only be loosened using a chisel. If, due to an emergency, the safety
screws (6) are removed with a chisel, they are to be replaced later.

4 5

6 6

1 Screwed-on covers
2 - 5 Windows secured with safety screws
6 Safety screws

1 / 16 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

General
 General notes on safety

3.2.4 Warning sign

The warning signs and yellow markings indicate a hazard zone. If work is carried out incorrectly at such
places, there is an increased risk of injury. Damaged or missing warning signs are to be replaced
immediately.

3 4

2
2

1
6

1 Warning signs: On control cabinet doors (left 5 Warning signs: On windows of R/S module (left
and right) and right)
2 Warning signs: At control-cabinet frequency 6 Mandatory sign: At R/S module (see operating
converters manual)
3 Prohibition signs: At machine
4 Warning sign: On cover at drive unit for spiked
lattice

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 1 / 17

General
General notes on safety

3.2.5 Covers for the openings near the spiked lattice

The covers for the openings may need to be removed for cleaning work. These covers may be removed only
when the main switch is in the “off” position and secured with a lock. Before removing the lock on the main
switch, the covers have to be re-fitted.

1 Steel covers
2 Plastic covers

3.2.6 Controls with safety function

1 2

1 Main switch, Page 2/8

2 EMERGENCY SHUT-DOWN
button, Page 2/9

1 / 18 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

General
 General notes on safety

3.3 Responsibilities and qualifications

Responsibilities
By clear rules defining who is responsible for what, the customer creates optimum requirements for ensuring
safety in the plant.
The areas of responsibility for each authorized person must be officially laid down.This applies in particular to
jobs involving setting and servicing mechanical, electric and pneumatic devices.
This guarantees that unauthorized persons do not have access to the machines.
Visitors may enter machine rooms only if accompanied by an authoirzed person..
It must be made clear to visitors that machines are a potential source of danger when running.

Training
Inadequately trained staff may cause accidents.
This may also result in injury to others.
Operating and maintenance staff must be given
theoretical and practical training.
This is the general purpose of this part of the in-
structions. The corresponding operating inform-
ation in the instructions refers to specific dangers
and must always be observed.
If well-trained personnel are in charge of
machines, then these will produce a higher
yield and a better quality, and there will be
fewer faults, higher output and fewer injuries.

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 1 / 19

General
General notes on safety

1 / 20 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

General
 Machine identification

4 Machine identification
Manufacturer
Maschinenfabrik Rieter AG
Klosterstrasse 20
CH-8406 Winterthur

Tel. no.: +41 52 208 71 71

Fax: +41 52 208 83 20

4.1 CE nameplate

Maschinenfabrik Rieter
CH-8406 Winterthur
Type XXX
Serial- No: 40000200-00275
YYeeaar 2 0 0 8
400 V 50 Hz 6 bar

- Machine type Specifies the exact type xxx V Voltage specification

- Serial no. Every machine has a xx Hz Mains frequency
unique serial number.
x bar Compressed air require-
- Year It shows the year the ment
machine was delivered.

When ordering spare parts, the nameplate information must be indicated on the order form.The second
nameplate can be found behind the door.

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 1 / 21

General
Machine identification

1 / 22 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

General
 Machine description

5 Machine description
5.1 Overview of subassemblies

1 2

R
16
3
L
4
5
5a

15 6
14
13 7
12
11 9 8
10

1 Dynamic storage 10 Spike lattice

2 Opening roller 11 Stripper rake
3 Material inlet with distributor flap 12 Operating unit
4 Take-off roller 13 Electro cabinet
5 Material inlet (without R/S module) 14 Conveyor belt
5a Material inlet (for R/S module) 15 Storage with 8 chambers
6 Compression rollers 16 Exhaust air
7 Feed rollers L/R The right and left side of the machine is de-
8 Opening roller termined by viewing it from the material deliv-
ery end.
9a Grating for R (cleaning)
9b Solid plate for S (synthetic fibres).

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 1 / 23

General
Machine description

1 / 24 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

General
 Specifications

6 Specifications
6.1 Performance characteristics
Use
Processing of textile raw This machine is
materials constructed
exclusively for
processing textile
raw materials.
Raw material
Cotton Cotton of all provenience.
Man-made fibres Man-made fibers: Natural and
synthetic polymers.

Fiber length
Maximum fibre length max. 65.0 mm

B 76 R/S: Cotton production

Production while the opening max. 1000.0 kg/h
roll runs in synchronism with
the upright lattice.
For waste mixtures, where max. 800.0 kg/h
the proportion of noils or
waste exceeds 40%.
B 76 R/S: Man-made fibre production
Production while the opening max. 1000.0 kg/h
roll runs in synchronism with
the upright lattice.

Opening roll speeds

Opening roll speed running 575 min-¹
in synchronism (min. 500,
max. 610)
Opening roll speed running 70 - 150 min-¹
in counter-rotation
Take-off roller
Take-off roll speed max. 612 min-¹

Spike lattice
Upright lattice speed 23.8 - 120.9 m / min.

Conveyor belt
Speed of conveyor belt 0.06 - 1.22 m / min.

Opening roller
Speed of the opening roller 500 - 1000 min-¹

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 1 / 25

General
Specifications

• Opening roller of the R/S module: (Alternative):

Version used for cotton: Grating with mote knives in the vicinity of the opening roller.
Version used for man-made fibres: Solid guide plate (instead of grating and mote knives) in the vicinity of
the opening roller.

• Mote-knife settings for the R/S module: (Alternative):

Manual procedure: Settings made without using programmed parameters.
Using VarioSet: Settings made using programmed parameters.

1 / 26 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

General
 Specifications

6.2 Dimensions
6.2.1 Space requirements for the B 76 and B 76 R/S

1368
4173
3300

1200

E-01
120

500
970
1570
90

106

160

C-02

E-02
B 76 (R/S)
82
C
B 76

40
6040

1300
590
400

2115
2193
4000
4069 4100 B
4500 A

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 1 / 27

General
Specifications

Location Designation Prerequisite Dimension

number
A Minimum Room Height see Plan mm (min. 4500)
(For installation and monitor-
ing.)
B Max. width with open doors 3498 mm
C Level uniformity per running Ground clearance: approx. 40 +/- 3.00 mm /m
meter mm
C-02 Extraction under upright lattice see Plan
upwards
Minimum Minimum distance from one min. 1200 mm
distance side of the machine to a wall or
to the next machine.
E-01 Electrical hook-up, bottom. see Plan
E-02 Electrical hook-up, top. see Plan

6.3 Weights
Designation Prerequisite Weights
Storage part complete B 76 Approx. 2500 kg

Designation Prerequisite Weights

Delivery section B 76 Approx. 2500 kg

Designation Prerequisite Weights

Take-off section B 76 Approx. 300 kg

Designation Prerequisite Weights

R/S module B 72 R/S Approx. 2000 kg

Designation Prerequisite Weights

Total weight B 76 Approx. 5300 kg

Designation Prerequisite Weights

Total weight B 72 R/S Approx. 7300 kg

1 / 28 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

General
 Specifications

6.4 Floor condition

1
2

1 Intermediate bearings: Floors that are laid on

sand or asphalt are not allowed.
2 Such intermediate supports in the region of the
foot plate should be replaced with concrete to
avoid the individual subassemblies from sinking.

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 1 / 29

General
Specifications

6.5 Machinery requirements

6.5.1 Air ratio
Air ratio

4 5
1

3
7

Exhaust system under 0.50 m³/s

upright lattice (1)
Material entry (2) 1.10 - 1.30 m³/s
Material outlet (3), 220-mm 0.60 - 0.90 m³/s
pipe diameter
Exhaust air (4) Approx. 1.20 m³/s
Static overpressure in the + 20 - + 40 Pa
exhaust air chamber (5)
R/S module: Material outlet 0.50 - 0.70 m³/s
(6), 220-mm pipe diameter
R/S module: Vacuum for min. 1000 Pa
waste disposal system (7)
R/S module: Air flow rate for min. 0.5 m³/s
waste disposal system (7)

1 / 30 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

General
 Specifications

6.5.2 Electrical data

Mains connection
Should the supply voltage 3x 400 V +/- 10%
not be within the specified
range, a transformer has to
be used to ensure stable
conditions.
Installed electrical power
Machine-specific data See the diagram provided

6.6 Emissions
6.6.1 Statement of Noise Emission pursuant to ISO 4871
Declared noise emissions level assessed as A (reference pressure 1 pW) LWad
Spike lattice: max. 89.5 m / < 70 + 3 dB
min.

Measurement standard: ISO 9902 measurement standard; measuring distance: 1 m; levels expressed in the
form: Lm + K Lm; typical mean value for K is 3 dB: safety margin. General conditions: Without material
Declared noise emissions level at the workstation(reference pressure 20 µPa) LpAd
Spike lattice: max. 89.5 m / < 70 + 3 dB
min.

Measurement standard: ISO 9902 measurement standard; measuring distance: 1 m; levels expressed in the
form: Lm + K Lm; typical mean value for K is 3 dB: safety margin. General conditions: With material

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 1 / 31

General
Specifications

1 / 32 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

General
 Putting into operation

7 Putting into operation

7.1 Commissioning
Machines manufactured by "Rieter Textile Systems" must always be assembled and commissioned by Ri-
eter's own staff.
Should the assembly of new or existing plant be carried out by a third party, however, RIETER MACHINE
WORKS LTD. declines all liability.

7.2 Decommissioning
Put the machine into a safe state.
disconnect the power supply.
Protect the machine from misuse.
Secure the machine in such a way that when it is idle there is no risk of injury to any person.
The machine-specific regulations with regard to decommissioning must be observed.
The machine must be suitably protected against soiling and corrosion.
The regulations and operating procedures specific to the machine are listed in the Chapter "Taking out of ser-
vice" in Part 3. These regulations, and particularly the safety regulations, must be adhered to most exactly.

7.3 Putting back into operation

All elements affecting safety must be tested to ensure that they are in perfect operating condition.
The machine-specific regulations with regard to re-commissioning must be observed.
The regulations and operating procedures specific to the machine are listed in the Chapter "Putting back into
service" in Part 3. These regulations, and particularly the safety regulations, must be adhered to most exactly.

7.4 Disposal
Disposal
In the case of the machine being conclusively removed from operation, the legal regulations of the relevant
country should be observed.
This applies in particular to:
Re-usability
Recycling
Waste disposal
It must be ensured that the fuel remaining in the machine is disposed of in accordance with regulations.
Fuel such as oils, grease and batteries.
The regulations and operating procedures specific to the machine are listed in the Chapter "Disposal" in Part
3. These regulations, and particularly the safety regulations, must be adhered to most exactly.

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 1 / 33

General
Putting into operation

1 / 34 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

General
 Instruction of personnel

8 Instruction of personnel
Safety advice for anybody using the machine.
— Safety devices
General notes on safety, Page 1/9
Secure the ladder, Page 1/14
Warning sign, Page 1/17
Secured doors and covers, Page 1/15
Bolted or non-fused covers, Page 1/16
Warning sign, Page 1/17
Controls with safety function, Page 1/18

Operation guidelines for anybody involved with the machine.

— Operation functions
Switching on main switch Q10, Page 2/21
Switching off the main switch., Page 2/21
Switch OFF the main switch and secure, Page 2/21
Starting the machine, Page 2/23, 2/25
Stop machine, Page 2/23, 2/25
Change the language, Page 2/28
How to acknowledge a malfunction., Page 2/28
Enter password, Page 2/30
Cancelling the password authorisation, Page 2/32
Displaying an individual data screen, Page 2/33
Navigating to a desired data screen with one key, Page 2/33
Display the last data screen again, Page 2/33
Display the last data screen again, Page 2/33
Browsing in the same masks, Page 2/34
Display main mask, Page 2/34
Changing values/settings in data screens, Page 2/35
Browsing lists, Page 2/35
Changing from standard time to summer time , Page 2/36
Sensor testing and display of I/O status via signal lamp, Page 2/36
Performing service functions, Page 2/37

Machine setup
— Setup, changeover, adjustments
Production is not reached, Page 3/3
Material transport in the storage area, Page 3/4
Open transfer, Page 3/5
Delivery section, Page 3/6
Replacing the operating unit (including the control unit), Page 3/9

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 1 / 35

General
Instruction of personnel

Description of the settings

— Subassemblies
Tension conveyor belt, Page 6/19
Aligning the conveyor belt, Page 6/20
Tightening the chain, Page 6/22
Adjusting the distance between the conveyor belt and the spiked lattice (standard
setting), Page 6/21
Adjust the pressure sensor, Page 6/25
Adjust the separating vanes, Page 6/27
Exhaust air, Page 6/28
Adjust the stripper rake, Page 6/31
Tension the spike lattice, Page 6/37
Position of the opening roller to the spiked lattice (standard setting), Page 6/43
Tighten the V-belt, Page 6/46
Distance of the Take-off Roller to the Spike Lattice, Page 6/48
Tighten the V-belt, Page 6/49

Description of the troubleshooting process

— Always consult part 5 of the operating manual in the event of a malfunction.

Description of the maintenance work

— Go over the maintenance and lubrication schedules of part 4 with maintenance staff and mechanics

1 / 36 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

General
 Instruction of personnel

Explanation on how to handle the electronic documentation (e-DOC)

— Navigating through the e-DOC program
Navigating through the e-DOC (electronic documentation) program , Page 2/38
Opening e-DOC , Page 2/39
Selecting the language and accepting the licence agreement, Page 2/39
Opening the home page , Page 2/39
Opening the “Settings” menu and entering data , Page 2/40
Entering ordering address , Page 2/41
Entering recipient’s address , Page 2/41
Opening the e-DOC overview screen , Page 2/42
Opening the spare parts catalogue , Page 2/42
Navigating through the spare parts catalogue , Page 2/43
Navigating through lower-level sub-assemblies in the spare parts catalogue , Page 2/43
Selecting spare parts for sub-assemblies , Page 2/44
Filling in the order form , Page 2/45
Saving the shopping basket information , Page 2/45
Example of an order , Page 2/46
Switching from the spare parts catalogue to the operating manual , Page 2/46
Navigating through the operating manual , Page 2/47
Searching for handling instructions in the operating manual , Page 2/47
Opening the operating manual , Page 2/48
Navigating through the operating manual , Page 2/48
Opening the troubleshooting information page , Page 2/48
Entering the fault code , Page 2/49
Rectifying faults , Page 2/49
Directly opening the order form for spare parts , Page 2/49
“Filling” and “saving” the shopping basket , Page 2/50
Closing the e-DOC program, Page 2/50

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 1 / 37

General
Instruction of personnel

1 / 38 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

General
Part 2

Operation

Part / Page

1 Controls and display elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 1

2 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 21

3 Display screens Operator panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 51

No. of pages 78

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 2/I

Operation
2 / II UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1
Operation
Contents

Part / Page

1 Controls and display elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 1

1.1 Overview of controls and display elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 1
1.1.1 Operating unit and machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 1
1.1.1.1 LED status display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 2
1.1.1.2 Functions of the program keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 3
1.1.1.3 Control keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 4
1.1.1.4 Keyboard and machine keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 5
1.1.1.5 LED's for CPU status on the basic module of the control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 6
1.1.2 T1000V frequency converter, operating unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 7
1.2 Operating elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 8
1.2.1 Operating unit and machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 8
1.2.1.1 Main switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 8
1.2.1.2 EMERGENCY SHUT-DOWN button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 9
1.2.2 Functions of the program keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 9
1.2.2.1 DIRECT key, forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 9
1.2.2.2 POINTER key back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 9
1.2.2.3 ENTER-key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 9
1.2.2.4 DIRECT-key back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 10
1.2.2.5 POINTER key forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 10
1.2.2.6 HELP-key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 10
1.2.2.7 MENU overview key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 10
1.2.2.8 START OF LIST key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 10
1.2.2.9 MINUS-key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 10
1.2.2.10 MINUS-ENTER-key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 11
1.2.2.11 PASSWORD-INSERT key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 11
1.2.2.12 PASSWORD-CANCELLING key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 11
1.2.2.13 END OF LIST key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 11
1.2.2.14 PLUS-key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 11
1.2.2.15 PLUS-ENTER-key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 11
1.2.2.16 SCREEN-key back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 12
1.2.2.17 SCREEN-key scroll forwards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 12
1.2.2.18 ENTER-key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 12
1.2.2.19 DELETE key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 12
1.2.3 Control keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 13
1.2.3.1 BASIC display key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 13
1.2.3.2 MENU-key back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 13
1.2.3.3 DATA-DISPLAY-key-back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 13
1.2.3.4 DATA-DISPLAY-key-forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 13
1.2.3.5 MENU-key forwards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 13
1.2.3.6 LANGUAGE-key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 14
1.2.4 Keyboard and machine keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 14
1.2.4.1 STOP key on the operator panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 14
1.2.4.2 START key on the operator panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 14
1.2.4.3 “Empty machine” machine button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 14
1.2.4.4 “Empty R/S module” machine button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 15
1.2.4.5 Machine key "destress" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 15

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 2 / III

Operation
 Part / Page

1.2.5 T1000V frequency converter, operating unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 16

1.2.5.1 Data display, frequency converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 16
1.2.5.2 ESC key, frequency converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 16
1.2.5.3 RESET key, frequency converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 16
1.2.5.4 RUN key, frequency converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 16
1.2.5.5 RUN LED, frequency converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 16
1.2.5.6 Down arrow key, frequency converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 17
1.2.5.7 STOP key, frequency converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 17
1.2.5.8 ENTER key, frequency converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 17
1.2.5.9 LOCAL/REMOTE key, frequency converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 17
1.2.5.10 LO-RE-LED, frequency converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 17
1.2.5.11 ALM LED, frequency converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 17
1.2.5.12 REV LED, frequency converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 18
1.2.5.13 DRV LED, frequency converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 18
1.2.5.14 FOUT LED, frequency converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 18
1.2.5.15 Up arrow key, frequency converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 18
1.3 Display elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 19
1.3.1 LED status display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 19
1.3.1.1 LED electric power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 19
1.3.1.2 LED automatic mode (production mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 19
1.3.1.3 LED "Alert" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 19
1.3.1.4 LED "Malfunction" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 20
1.3.1.5 LED call "Service personnel" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 20
1.3.2 LED's for CPU status on the basic module of the control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 20
1.3.2.1 CPU status, display on the basic module of the control unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 20

2 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 21
2.1 Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 21
2.1.1 Switching on main switch Q10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 21
2.1.2 Switching off the main switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 21
2.1.3 Switch OFF the main switch and secure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 21
2.1.4 Engaging the emergency stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 22
2.1.5 Resetting the EMERGENCY STOP button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 22
2.2 Operating the machine (without R/S module) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 23
2.2.1 Starting the machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 23
2.2.2 Stop machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 23
2.2.3 Emptying the machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 24
2.2.4 Rectifying machine deficiencies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 24
2.3 Operating the machine (with R/S module) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 25
2.3.1 Starting the machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 25
2.3.2 Stop machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 25
2.3.3 Emptying the machine (R/S module attached) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 26
2.3.4 Clearing of blockages and rectification of machine deficiencies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 27
2.4 Operating unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 28
2.4.1 Change the language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 28
2.4.2 How to acknowledge a malfunction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 28
2.4.3 Display additional help for troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 29
2.4.4 Enter password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 30
2.4.5 Changing passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 31
2.4.6 Cancelling the password authorisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 32
2.4.7 What do you do if you have forgotten the master password? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 32

2 / IV UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Operation
 Part / Page

2.4.8 Displaying an individual data screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 33

2.4.9 Navigating to a desired data screen with one key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 33
2.4.10 Display the last data screen again . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 33
2.4.11 Browsing in the same masks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 34
2.4.12 Display main mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 34
2.4.13 Changing values/settings in data screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 35
2.4.14 Browsing lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 35
2.4.15 Changing from standard time to summer time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 36
2.4.16 Sensor testing and display of I/O status via signal lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 36
2.4.17 Performing service functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 37
2.4.18 Setting the brightness of the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 38
2.5 Electronic documentation (e-DOC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 38
2.5.1 Navigating through the e-DOC (electronic documentation) program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 38
2.5.2 Opening e-DOC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 39
2.5.3 Selecting the language and accepting the licence agreement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 39
2.5.4 Opening the home page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 39
2.5.5 Opening the “Settings” menu and entering data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 40
2.5.6 Entering ordering address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 41
2.5.7 Entering recipient’s address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 41
2.5.8 Opening the e-DOC overview screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 42
2.5.9 Opening the spare parts catalogue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 42
2.5.10 Navigating through the spare parts catalogue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 43
2.5.11 Navigating through lower-level sub-assemblies in the spare parts catalogue . . . . . . . . 2 / 43
2.5.12 Selecting spare parts for sub-assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 44
2.5.13 Filling in the order form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 45
2.5.14 Saving the shopping basket information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 45
2.5.15 Example of an order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 46
2.5.16 Switching from the spare parts catalogue to the operating manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 46
2.5.17 Navigating through the operating manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 47
2.5.18 Searching for handling instructions in the operating manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 47
2.5.19 Opening the operating manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 48
2.5.20 Navigating through the operating manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 48
2.5.21 Opening the troubleshooting information page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 48
2.5.22 Entering the fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 49
2.5.23 Rectifying faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 49
2.5.24 Directly opening the order form for spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 49
2.5.25 “Filling” and “saving” the shopping basket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 50
2.5.26 Closing the e-DOC program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 50

3 Display screens Operator panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 51

3.1 Structure of menu and data screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 51
3.2 List of menu and data screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 52
3.3 Overview screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 54
3.4 Menu 10: "10 Production" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 58
3.5 Menu 11: "11 Machine functions" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 61
3.6 Menu 30: "30 Information, general" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 61
3.7 Menu 31: "31 Information protocols / statistics" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 64
3.8 Menu 40: "40 Setup values, general" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 66
3.9 Menu 41: "41 Setup values, configurations" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 69

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 2/V

Operation
 Part / Page

3.10 Menu 80: "80 Operating mode" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 70

3.11 Menu 81: "81 IO tests" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 71
3.12 Menu 82: "82 Functional tests" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 72
3.13 Menu 83: "83 Endurance test" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 76
3.14 Menu 84: "84 General test" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 76
3.15 System functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 77

2 / VI UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Operation
 Controls and display elements

1 Controls and display elements

1.1 Overview of controls and display elements
1.1.1 Operating unit and machine

6
2

3
1
0
4

1 LED status display 6 EMERGENCY SHUT-DOWN

button, Page 2/9
2 Functions of the program keys
3 Control keys 8 LED's for CPU status on the basic
4 Keyboard and machine keys module of the control system
5 Main switch, Page 2/8

The operator interface panel is the interface between the operator and the machine control system.
All the functions of machine operation are available with the operational controls and displays on the operator
panel.
The surface of the operator panel consists of 4 segments.

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 2/1

Operation
Controls and display elements

1.1.1.1 LED status display

The state of the machine is shown by means of 5
LEDs

1 LED electric power

supply, Page 2/19

2 LED automatic mode

(production mode), Page 2/19

3 LED "Alert", Page 2/19

4 LED "Malfunction", Page 2/20

5 LED call "Service

personnel", Page 2/20

2/2 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Operation
 Controls and display elements

1.1.1.2 Functions of the program keys

The function of the program keys, immediately
below the display unit, depends on the displayed
screen.
Program keys are also known as soft keys.
For example, the function of the fourth program key
is different in the basic screen from what it is in a
data screen.
The corresponding symbol/icon above the key in-
dicates the function.

1 DIRECT key,
forward, Page 2/9
POINTER key back, Page 2/9
ENTER-key, Page 2/9
2 DIRECT-key back, Page 2/10
POINTER key
forward, Page 2/10
HELP-key, Page 2/10
3 MENU overview
key, Page 2/10
START OF LIST
key, Page 2/10
MINUS-key, Page 2/10
MINUS-ENTER-
key, Page 2/11
4 PASSWORD-INSERT
key, Page 2/11
PASSWORD-CANCELLING
key, Page 2/11
END OF LIST key, Page 2/11
PLUS-key, Page 2/11
PLUS-ENTER-key, Page 2/11
5 SCREEN-key
back, Page 2/12
6 SCREEN-key scroll
forwards, Page 2/12
ENTER-key, Page 2/12
DELETE key, Page 2/12

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 2/3

Operation
Controls and display elements

1.1.1.3 Control keys

The control keys enable you to navigate between
the basic screens, the menu screen and the data
screens.
Press the right-hand key to change the language
on the display unit.

1 BASIC display key, Page 2/13

2 MENU-key back, Page 2/13

3 DATA-DISPLAY-key-
back, Page 2/13

4 DATA-DISPLAY-key-
forward, Page 2/13

5 MENU-key forwards
, Page 2/13

6 LANGUAGE-key, Page 2/14

2/4 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Operation
 Controls and display elements

1.1.1.4 Keyboard and machine keys

1 STOP key on the operator 4 “Empty R/S module” machine

panel, Page 2/14 button, Page 2/15

2 START key on the operator 5 Machine key

panel, Page 2/14 "destress", Page 2/15

3 “Empty machine” machine

button, Page 2/14

The machine keys enable you to operate the basic functions of the machine.
If a function is triggered via a machine key, the corresponding LED flashes while the function is being per-
formed.
Otherwise the LED remains lit up as long as the key remains depressed, but for at least 2 seconds.

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 2/5

Operation
Controls and display elements

1.1.1.5 LED's for CPU status on the basic module of the control system
- CPU status, display on the basic module
of the control unit, Page 2/20

2/6 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Operation
 Controls and display elements

1.1.2 T1000V frequency converter, operating unit

1 Data display, frequency
10 converter, Page 2/16
2 ESC key, frequency
1 converter, Page 2/16
9
3 RESET key, frequency
2 8 converter, Page 2/16

3 7 4 RUN key, frequency

converter, Page 2/16
4 6
RUN LED, frequency
5 converter, Page 2/16
5 Down arrow key, frequency
converter, Page 2/17

6 STOP key, frequency

converter, Page 2/17

7 ENTER key, frequency

converter, Page 2/17

8 LOCAL/REMOTE key,
frequency
converter, Page 2/17
LO-RE-LED, frequency
converter, Page 2/17
9 ALM LED, frequency
converter, Page 2/17
REV LED, frequency
converter, Page 2/18
DRV LED, frequency
converter, Page 2/18
FOUT LED, frequency
converter, Page 2/18
10 Up arrow key, frequency
converter, Page 2/18

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 2/7

Operation
Controls and display elements

1.2 Operating elements

1.2.1 Operating unit and machine

1.2.1.1 Main switch

WARNING
When the main switch is set to the "on" position, elements downstream of the main switch are
live.
Injury due to electric shock.
Prior to commencing electrical installation work, switch off the machine via the main switch and
secure the switch with a padlock.
The main switch has to be turned off and secured to carry out the following tasks: Cleaning, re-
pair, service, and work in the control cabinet.

WARNING
Elements subject to external voltage may still be live even with the main switch off.
Injury due to electric shock
Prior to commencing work, the elements that are subject to external voltage must be isolated.
This isolation procedure may only be carried out by a qualified electrician.

CAUTION
The machine will run down in an uncontrolled manner if the main switch is turned off during oper-
ation.
The machine may become damaged.
The main switch may be only operated with the machine at a standstill.

Description of function
Use the main switch to turn the operating power on and off.
Off, position "0"
The machine is without power. The machine
cannot be started.

On, position "1"

Operating position

2/8 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Operation
 Controls and display elements

1.2.1.2 EMERGENCY SHUT-DOWN button

Description of function
EMERGENCY SHUT-DOWN buttons are intended
to be used in an emergency. When an
EMERGENCY SHUT-DOWN button is actuated all
drives are immediately shut down. This enables
danger from moving machine parts to be avoided
as quickly as possible.
Actuated
The machine is put into a safe state as quickly
as possible.
The machine cannot be started as long as the
EMERGENCY SHUT-DOWN button is
actuated.

Released
Operating conditions

1.2.2 Functions of the program keys

1.2.2.1 DIRECT key, forward

Description of function
Prerequisite: This key is not included in all con-
trol systems.
Use the "DIRECT next key" to go to the configured
data screen. You can use the "DIRECT next key"
to go directly to a frequently needed data screen.
The data screen number indicates which screen
the system will go to. The first program key is al-
ways assigned.

1.2.2.2 POINTER key back

Description of function
Use the "POINTER key back" to mark the previous
menu in the menu-overview. The previous input or
list field is marked in the data screen.

1.2.2.3 ENTER-key
Description of function
Prerequisite: This programming key does not ap-
pear on the display until the control system has as-
certained that the malfunction has been remedied.
Use the "ACKNOWLEDGE-key" to acknowledge a
message or a displayed malfunction.

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 2/9

Operation
Controls and display elements

1.2.2.4 DIRECT-key back

Description of function
Use the "DIRECT-key back" to jump from the basic
screen to the data screen last shown. The occu-
pancy is always on the second program key. After
switching on the machine or when the last screen
displayed can no longer be displayed, an empty
box appears (no function).

1.2.2.5 POINTER key forward

Description of function
Use the POINTER key forward to mark the next
menu in the menu-overview. The next input or list
field is marked in the data screen.

1.2.2.6 HELP-key
Description of function
If there is context-sensitive help for a malfunction
screen, it can be displayed by means of the "HELP-
key".

1.2.2.7 MENU overview key

Description of function
The "MENU overview key" is used to show the
menu overview.

1.2.2.8 START OF LIST key

Description of function
Prerequisite: The LIST length exceeds the mon-
itor screen length.
Use the “START OF LIST” key to jump to the start
of the list.

1.2.2.9 MINUS-key
Description of function
Use the “MINUS” key to reduce the value. The text
box, wherein changes are made, has a negative
image. The changed value becomes active for the
control system only after it has been confirmed by
the "ENTER" key. For most setting values, the
“MINUS” key only appears, if the correct password
was previously entered.

2 / 10 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Operation
 Controls and display elements

1.2.2.10 MINUS-ENTER-key
Description of function
Use the "MINUS-ENTER-key" to reduce and imme-
diately save the value. The "MINUS-ENTER-key"
is only shown with variable values which are accep-
ted immediately. i.e. the transfer of the value need
not be explicitly confirmed with the ENTER-key.

1.2.2.11 PASSWORD-INSERT key

Description of function
Use the "PASSWORD-INSERT-key" to display the
first screen for entering the password.

1.2.2.12 PASSWORD-CANCELLING key

Description of function
Use the "PASSWORD-CANCELING-key" to cancel
the active password authorization

1.2.2.13 END OF LIST key

Description of function
Prerequisite: The LIST length exceeds the mon-
itor screen length.
Use the “END OF LIST” key to jump to the end of
the list.

1.2.2.14 PLUS-key
Description of function
Use the "PLUS" key to increase the value. The text
box, wherein changes are made, has a negative
image. The changed value becomes active for the
control system only after it has been confirmed by
the "ENTER" key. For most setting values, the
“PLUS” key only appears, if the correct password
was previously entered.

1.2.2.15 PLUS-ENTER-key
Description of function
Use the "PLUS-ENTER-key" to increase and imme-
diately save the value. The PLUS-ENTER-key is
only shown with variable values which are accep-
ted immediately. i.e. the transfer of the value need
not be explicitly confirmed with the ENTER-key.

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 2 / 11

Operation
Controls and display elements

1.2.2.16 SCREEN-key back

Description of function
Use the "SCREEN-key back" to display the
previous screen. These may be data screens,
basic screens or malfunction screens. The
menu-overview displays the last data screen of the
preceding menu.

1.2.2.17 SCREEN-key scroll forwards

Description of function
Use the SCREEN-key forward to display the next
screen. The menu-overview displays the first data
screen of the menu.

1.2.2.18 ENTER-key
Description of function
Press the "ENTER-key" to accept the entry/change
of value, i.e. the altered value is saved.

1.2.2.19 DELETE key

Description of function
Use the “DELETE” key to delete a changed entry.
The previously stored value will be displayed again.
This is not possible for keys where the chosen
value is effective immediately.

2 / 12 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Operation
 Controls and display elements

1.2.3 Control keys

1.2.3.1 BASIC display key

Description of function
Use the "BASIC-DISPLAY-key" to jump from the
menu screen or some data screen into the
overview (standard basic screen or malfunction
screen).

1.2.3.2 MENU-key back

Description of function
In the menu overview the "MENU-key back" marks
the preceding line of the menu or displays the
menus screen. After the first line of the menu the
last line of the menu is displayed.

1.2.3.3 DATA-DISPLAY-key-back
Description of function
The "DATA-DISPLAY-key-backward" displays the
previous data screen. After the first data screen the
menu overview is displayed again.

1.2.3.4 DATA-DISPLAY-key-forward
Description of function
The "DATA-DISPLAY-key-forward" displays the
next data screen. After the last data screen the
menu overview is displayed again.

1.2.3.5 MENU-key forwards

Description of function
In the menu overview the MENU-key forwards“
marks the next line of the menu or displays the
menu screen. After the last line of the menu, the
first line of the menu is displayed.

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 2 / 13

Operation
Controls and display elements

1.2.3.6 LANGUAGE-key
Description of function
Use the "LANGUAGE key" to go to the next con-
figured language.

1.2.4 Keyboard and machine keys

1.2.4.1 STOP key on the operator panel

Identifying feature: Red
Description of function
The "STOP" key stops production mode or the cur-
rently active process.

1.2.4.2 START key on the operator panel

Identifying feature: Green
Description of function
The START key starts the production mode. If the
machine cannot be started the cause is shown as
an error message. In service mode the "START"
key starts the currently selected function.

1.2.4.3 “Empty machine” machine button

Description of function
Prerequisite: The emptying option can only be
selected in automatic mode. The emptying process
is not performed until the production mode is act-
ive.
No more material is being requested by the pre-
ceding machine. Normal production is continued.
If the fill level falls below the minimum acceptable
level, the feed fan is deactivated. In order to finish
the emptying process, the button must be pressed
a second time. The LED goes out and the UNImix
continues with normal production.

2 / 14 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Operation
 Controls and display elements

1.2.4.4 “Empty R/S module” machine button

Description of function
This button is used for emptying the module. Once
the emptying process is activated, no more ma-
terial is requested by the spiked lattice. If the light
barrier associated with the minimum fill level of the
R/S module responds, the machine remains active
for a maximum of 5 minutes (pure running time).
Subsequently, the compression rollers and feed
rollers are deactivated and the machine adopts the
“Empty” status. During the emptying process, the
corresponding LED flashes.

1.2.4.5 Machine key "destress"

Description of function
The purpose of this function is to clear blockages.
It can only be executed when the machine is in the
“ready for operation” state. The function remains
active, all the while the button is pressed. The as-
sociated LED remains lit, for as long as the button
is pressed. With this function, the feed belt runs at
a high speed, while the spiked lattice moves slowly
in reverse. In the R/S module, the feed and com-
pression rollers rotate at creep speed in the direc-
tion opposite to the “production” direction. As soon
as the button is released, all drives stop.

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 2 / 15

Operation
Controls and display elements

1.2.5 T1000V frequency converter, operating unit

1.2.5.1 Data display, frequency converter

Identifying feature: Seven-segment display
Description of function
Indicates monitoring data, parameter numbers and
settings.

1.2.5.2 ESC key, frequency converter

Description of function
Used to return to the previous menu.

1.2.5.3 RESET key, frequency converter

Description of function
Used to move the cursor to the right and to
acknowledge a fault after it has been rectified.

1.2.5.4 RUN key, frequency converter

Description of function
Used to start frequency converter operation, given
that the frequency is being controlled via the oper-
ating unit (local mode).

1.2.5.5 RUN LED, frequency converter

Description of function
The signals provided by the LED (and their interpretations) are as follows:
Lit
The motor is running.

Flashing
The speed is being reduced.
The reference value for the frequency is 0.

Rapid flashing
Drive is not active

2 / 16 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Operation
 Controls and display elements

1.2.5.6 Down arrow key, frequency converter

Description of function
Used to move partial image down, move cursor
down, and reduce values.

1.2.5.7 STOP key, frequency converter

Description of function
Used to stop frequency converter operation.

1.2.5.8 ENTER key, frequency converter

Description of function
Used to confirm and save adjusted values and
parameter settings.

1.2.5.9 LOCAL/REMOTE key, frequency converter

Description of function
Used to switch between the control unit involving
the operating unit (LOCAL) and the control termin-
als (REMOTE).

1.2.5.10 LO-RE-LED, frequency converter

Description of function
The signal provided by the LED (and its interpretation) is as follows:
Lit
The frequency converter is being controlled via the digital operating unit (local mode).

1.2.5.11 ALM LED, frequency converter

Description of function
The signals provided by the LED (and their inter-
pretations) are as follows:
Flashing
The drive has the “Alarm” status

Lit
The drive has the “Fault” status

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 2 / 17

Operation
Controls and display elements

1.2.5.12 REV LED, frequency converter

Description of function
The signals provided by the LED (and their inter-
pretations) are as follows:
Lit
The motor runs in reverse.

Unlit
The motor runs forwards.

1.2.5.13 DRV LED, frequency converter

Description of function
The signals provided by the LED (and their inter-
pretations) are as follows:
Lit
The drive is ready.

Unlit
The drive is in one of the following modes:
“Verify”, “Setup”, “Parameter Setting”, “Auto”

1.2.5.14 FOUT LED, frequency converter

Description of function
The signals provided by the LED (and their inter-
pretations) are as follows:
Lit
The output frequency is indicated.

Unlit
A feature other than the output frequency is
indicated.

1.2.5.15 Up arrow key, frequency converter

Description of function
Used to move partial image up, move cursor up,
and increase values.

2 / 18 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Operation
 Controls and display elements

1.3 Display elements

1.3.1 LED status display

1.3.1.1 LED electric power supply

Type of element: LED
Display state
• Does not light up
There is no control voltage
The main switch is off

• Lights up
There is control voltage
The main switch is on

• Flashing
An interruption in the power supply has caused
the control system to switch off.
After switching on, the LED flashes until a con-
trol key or machine key is actuated.

1.3.1.2 LED automatic mode (production mode)

Type of element: LED
Display state
• Does not light up
Production mode has stopped.

• Lights up
Machine runs in automatic mode (production
mode).
State of the machine= Production mode

• Flashing
Going into production mode

1.3.1.3 LED "Alert"

Type of element: LED
Lights up if there is an alert.

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 2 / 19

Operation
Controls and display elements

1.3.1.4 LED "Malfunction"

Type of element: LED
Lights up if there is a malfunction.

1.3.1.5 LED call "Service personnel"

Type of element: LED
Lights up if you have to call service personnel to
rectify a malfunction.

1.3.2 LED's for CPU status on the basic module of the control system

1.3.2.1 CPU status, display on the basic module of the control unit
Type of element: 6 LEDs
The six status LEDs indicate the operating mode of
the control unit.
Display state
• (1) Flashing, Yellow
Data communication from or to the CAN con-
troller.

• (2) Lights up, Red

Service mode is active, e.g. for software down-
load.

• (3) Lights up, Yellow

Software download into Flash-PROM is run-
ning

• (4) Flashing, Yellow

Indicates whether data is being received or
sent at the RS232-interface

• (5) Lights up, Green

RUN.

• (6) Lights up, Yellow

Service mode is active.

2 / 20 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Operation
 Operation

2 Operation
2.1 Safety
2.1.1 Switching on main switch Q10
Steps
– Turn the main switch to position "1".
The LED for the control voltage begins to
flash, light up
Main switch, Page 2/8

2.1.2 Switching off the main switch.

Steps
– Turn the main switch to position "0".
The LED for the control voltage goes out.
Main switch, Page 2/8

2.1.3 Switch OFF the main switch and secure

Steps
– Switch OFF the main switch.
– Pull the lever (1) in the direction of the arrow
and attach a padlock.

– Close the padlock.

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 2 / 21

Operation
Operation

2.1.4 Engaging the emergency stop

Steps
– Press the EMERGENCY STOP button.
The machine is put into a safe operating
state as quickly as possible.

2.1.5 Resetting the EMERGENCY STOP button

Steps
– Prerequisite: The reason for engaging the
EMERGENCY STOP have been clarified and
remedied.
Turn the EMERGENCY STOP button clock-
wise.
The EMERGENCY STOP button will pop
up. Doing so has reset the EMERGENCY
STOP button; it is no longer engaged.

2 / 22 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Operation
 Operation

2.2 Operating the machine (without R/S module)

2.2.1 Starting the machine
Preparatory work
– The machine is programmed

Steps
– Prerequisite: Main switch is switched ON. No
malfunctions are indicated.
Press the START button.
The preliminary opening roller and the
take-off roller start. If material is
requested and the storage unit is ready
for operation, the spiked lattice will also
start.

2.2.2 Stop machine

Steps
– Use the STOP button to stop the machine at
any time.
All drives switch off.

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 2 / 23

Operation
Operation

2.2.3 Emptying the machine

Steps
– Press machine button (4) on the operating
unit.
Material feed to the storage unit of the
machine is stopped. The machine
empties.
Note: Press machine button (4) again to re-
start the feeding of material to the storage unit.
4 – Prerequisite: The machine (still ready to op-
erate following the emptying procedure) is to
be stopped.
Press machine button (5 ).
The machine will be stopped.
5

2.2.4 Rectifying machine deficiencies.

Steps
– The spiked lattice and the conveyor belt run in
reverse all the while the button remains
pressed.

2 / 24 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Operation
 Operation

2.3 Operating the machine (with R/S module)

2.3.1 Starting the machine
Preparatory work
– The machine is programmed

Steps
– Prerequisite: Main switch is switched ON. No
malfunctions are indicated.
Press the START button.
The preliminary opening roller and the
take-off roller start. If material is
requested and the storage unit is ready
for operation, the spiked lattice will also
start.

2.3.2 Stop machine

Steps
– Use the STOP button to stop the machine at
any time.
All drives switch off.

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 2 / 25

Operation
Operation

2.3.3 Emptying the machine (R/S module attached)

Steps
– Press machine button (4) on the operating unit.
Material feed to the storage unit of the
machine is stopped. The machine
empties. Once the machine is empty, the
compression and feed rollers, along with
the opening roller, are stopped. The
machine remains ready for operation.
4 Note: Press machine button (4) again to re-
start the feeding of material to the storage unit.

– Prerequisite: The machine (still ready to op-

erate following the emptying procedure) is to
be stopped.
5 Press machine button (5 ).
The machine will be stopped.

2 / 26 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Operation
 Operation

2.3.4 Clearing of blockages and rectification of machine deficiencies.

Clearing blockages (feed and compression rollers can be rotated in the reverse direction)

2 3 4 5 6

– Prerequisite: The doors must be closed. The machine is ready for operation but is not producing. There
must be no faults displayed.
Rectify and confirm the cleared status of any fault displayed.
How to acknowledge a malfunction., Page 2/28

– Press and hold machine button (1).

The compression rollers (2) and the feed rollers (3) rotate in reverse.

– After 20 - 30 seconds, release machine button (1).

– Attempt to move the opening roller (5) by rotating the belt pulley (4).

– If the opening roller (5) can be moved freely, the machine can be restarted.
If the opening roller (5) is blocked, remove the material responsible for the blockage.

Clearing blockages (feed and compression rollers cannot be rotated in the reverse direction)
WARNING
Set the main switch to the “off” position and secure it with a lock.

– Remove all covers (6).

– Remove the material responsible for the blockage from the area around the opening roller (5) by hand, or
using suitable tools.

– Continually attempt to move the opening roller (5) by rotating the belt pulley (4).

– Once the opening roller (5) can be moved freely, re-mount all covers (6).
Then restart the machine.

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 2 / 27

Operation
Operation

2.4 Operating unit

2.4.1 Change the language
The "LANGUAGE SELECTION" key allows different languages to be selected.
Steps
– Prerequisite: The required language must be
activated using the data screen .
40.2, Page 2/66
Press the "LANGUAGE SELECTION" key (6)
until the required language is displayed.
LANGUAGE-key, Page 2/14

2.4.2 How to acknowledge a malfunction.

In the event of a malfunction, the corresponding malfunction mask appears in the overview.
Note: Press the "ACKNOWLEDGE" key and/or "START" key to reset errors that no longer exist.
Steps
– Press the "ACKNOWLEDGE" key (6).
Once the malfunction is remedied, it is
reset, i.e. no longer displayed.
Note: The "ACKNOWLEDGE" key appears
only when the displayed malfunction is no
longer current. Otherwise, the malfunction
must first be cleared.
ENTER-key, Page 2/9

– Box (4) indicates the number of malfunctions.

Use the (11) key to display the next malfunc-
tion. Use the (10) key to display the previous
malfunction.
– Press the "START key" to start up the machine
once all the malfunctions have been cleared.
If malfunctions are still present, however, then
these will be displayed and the machine will
not start.

2 / 28 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Operation
 Operation

2.4.3 Display additional help for troubleshooting

If a malfunction is displayed, an additional help text may sometimes also be displayed.
Note: A supporting help message is only offered for complex malfunctions.
Steps
– Press the "HELP" key (7).
The error display is overwritten by an
additional help message.
HELP-key, Page 2/10
Example of a message
display, Page 2/54

– Press "DISPLAY back" key (10).

The malfunction mask is displayed again.
SCREEN-key back, Page 2/12

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 2 / 29

Operation
Operation

2.4.4 Enter password

Some entries and tests in data screens can only be executed with the required authorisation after entering a
password.
Authorization levels
Level 0 (no password) Read
Level 1 (password required) Change
Level 2 (password required) Service
Level master (password Change
required) passwords

Note: The authorisation necessary for an intended action is shown in the list of menu and data screens.
Steps
– Select main mask.
Display main mask, Page 2/34

– Press the "ENTER PASSWORD" key (4) in the

main mask.
The mask for the password input is
displayed.
9, Page 2/78

– Enter the corresponding 4-digit password us-

ing softkeys 1-5.
Note: Valid digits for the password are 0-4 that
can be entered using the first 5 programming
keys.

– Press the "C" key to delete the code and enter

a new one.

– After entering the password, press one of the

keys "<<", "<", ">", ">>" or the “MAIN MASK”
key.
The crossed out key (4) is displayed in
the main mask, i.e. the password has
been accepted and the appropriate
authorisation, e.g. for input, is active.
PASSWORD-CANCELLING
key, Page 2/11

– After entering the password you can go in the

menu overview where the appropriate menus
are displayed and enabled.

2 / 30 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Operation
 Operation

2.4.5 Changing passwords

The passwords for the various authorisations can be assigned and changed individually. The master pass-
word can also be changed.
Note: In order to alter the password, you must know the master password.
Steps
– Select main mask.
Display main mask, Page 2/34

– Press the "ENTER PASSWORD" key (4) in the

main mask.
The mask for the password input is
displayed.
Enter password, Page 2/30
9, Page 2/78

– Now enter the master password (1) and press

the "DISPLAY forward" key (2).
The mask for changing the password is
displayed.
9.1, Page 2/78

– Enter the new code twice per password and

display the next password step by pressing the
sixth programming key ">".
Note: If you do not want to change a pass-
word, you can go on to the next password step
by pressing the programming key ">".

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 2 / 31

Operation
Operation

2.4.6 Cancelling the password authorisation

By cancelling the password authorisation, you can prevent anybody not authorised from altering data or carry-
ing out test functions.
Note: The password authorisation for inputs is automatically cancelled if no key is pressed for 10 minutes.
For tests it is after 10 hours.
Steps
– Select main mask.
Display main mask, Page 2/34

– Press the "CANCEL PASSWORD" key (4) in

the main mask.
The key symbol for the programming key
is no longer crossed out, i.e. the
password authorisation is cancelled. A
new password input is necessary in order
for data to be changed or tests to be run.
PASSWORD-CANCELLING
key, Page 2/11

2.4.7 What do you do if you have forgotten the master password?

Note: The master password is required for changing passwords. This master password should only be
known to an administrator.
Steps
– If the master password is no longer known, a special password has to be requested from Rieter that is
valid for one day.

– On delivery of the machine, the authorisations S2 - S3 are assigned the standard password 1001. The
master password is 1423.

2 / 32 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Operation
 Operation

2.4.8 Displaying an individual data screen

In order to view actual values, alter settings or run tests, it is necessary to display the appropriate data
screen.
Note: Before a data screen with authorisation protection can be displayed you must first enter the appropriate
password.
Steps
– Prerequisite: A main mask (overview mask or
error) is displayed.
Press the "MENU OVERVIEW" key (3).
The menu overview is displayed.
MENU overview key, Page 2/10

– Press the "CURSOR forward" (2) or the

"CURSOR back" key (1) until the required
menu is marked.
POINTER key forward, Page 2/10
POINTER key back, Page 2/9

– Press the "DISPLAY forward" key (6) or the

"DISPLAY back" key (5) until the required data
screen is displayed.
SCREEN-key scroll forwards, Page 2/12
Navigating to a desired data screen with
one key, Page 2/33

2.4.9 Navigating to a desired data screen with one key

There is another easy method of accessing the data screens.
Steps
– Press the "DISPLAY forward" key (4) or "DIS-
PLAY back" key (3).
Each touch of the key calls up the next or
the previous data screen or menu.
DATA-DISPLAY-key-forward, Page 2/13
DATA-DISPLAY-key-back, Page 2/13

2.4.10 Display the last data screen again

In the overview mask you can use the "DIRECT back" key to return to the data screen you were viewing last.
(In this example you jump to data screen 50.2).
Steps
– Press the “DIRECT back” key (2).
The last data screen displayed is shown
again. (In this example you jump to data
screen 50.2).
DIRECT-key back, Page 2/10

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 2 / 33

Operation
Operation

2.4.11 Browsing in the same masks

Browsing from one overview mask to another if there are several of them. Display the next malfunction if
there are several pending malfunctions simultaneously.
Steps
– Press the "DISPLAY forward" or "DISPLAY back" key (programming key 5 or 6).
The next masks are selected.
SCREEN-key scroll forwards, Page 2/12
SCREEN-key back, Page 2/12

2.4.12 Display main mask

Independently of which mask is on the screen, touching any key immediately changes the display back to the
main mask (standard overview mask or error display).
Steps
– Press the "MAIN MASK" key (1) once.
BASIC display key, Page 2/13

– If a malfunction is displayed, the standard

overview mask appears as long as the "MAIN
MASK" key (1) is pressed.
BASIC display key, Page 2/13

2 / 34 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Operation
 Operation

2.4.13 Changing values/settings in data screens

Values and settings can be changed in the corresponding data screens. To do so, first enter the password for
input authorisation.
Steps
– If several modifiable values are displayed in
the data screen, first use the "CURSOR for-
ward" (2) or the "CURSOR back" key (1) to
highlight the value to be changed (7).
POINTER key forward, Page 2/10
POINTER key back, Page 2/9

– Change the value with the "PLUS" key (4) or

the "MINUS" key (3).
MINUS-key, Page 2/10
PLUS-key, Page 2/11

– If an incorrect value was entered, you can use

the "DELETE" key (5).
The original value (before you pressed
the "+" or "-" key) is displayed again.
Note: The “DELETE” key appears only if the
changed values have to be confirmed.
DELETE key, Page 2/12

– Press the "ENTER" key (6) to confirm the input

and to save the change.
Note: The “ENTER” key appears in the bottom
right-hand corner only if the changed values
have to be confirmed.
ENTER-key, Page 2/12

2.4.14 Browsing lists

Displayed lists may be larger and may therefore not be completely displayed on the screen. The following
programming keys are provided in the data screen for this.
Steps
– Press the "CURSOR forward" (2) or the
"CURSOR back" key (1).
The mark is moved up or down by one
field.
POINTER key back, Page 2/9
POINTER key forward, Page 2/10

– Press the "START OF LIST" key (3).

This takes you to the beginning of the list.
START OF LIST key, Page 2/10

– Press the "END OF LIST" key (4).

This takes you to the end of the list
END OF LIST key, Page 2/11

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 2 / 35

Operation
Operation

2.4.15 Changing from standard time to summer time

The changeover from standard time (winter time) to summer time or vice-versa is made via the operator
panel.
Steps
– Prerequisite: First enter at least the input
password.
Display data screen 40.1.
40.1, Page 2/66

– Change the time displayed in the second row

with the "PLUS“ key or the "MINUS“ key.

– Press the “ENTER" key to save the change.

The time displayed in the data screen is
now one hour forward or back.
ENTER-key, Page 2/12

2.4.16 Sensor testing and display of I/O status via signal lamp
All elements such as sensors, switches etc. whose I/O status is read by the control system can be tested.
This is done in data screen 81.1. The I/O status (1 or 0) of the selected element is displayed in the data
screen as well as at the signal lamp.
Steps
– Display data screen 81.1.

– Select element group and element.

The I/O status is displayed in the data screen as 1=24 VDC or 0=0 VDC. Display on signal lamp:
0=dark, 1=lit up.

2 / 36 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Operation
 Operation

2.4.17 Performing service functions

WARNING
Activating machine functions via data screens causes mechanical movements to be triggered
immediately.
Risk of injury due to moving machine parts.
Ensure that there is no person present in the hazard zone.
Only authorised and trained personnel may perform tasks in service mode.

Individual machine functions can be performed for troubleshooting and maintenance work.
Steps
– All doors and covers in the safety loop must be closed.

– Prerequisite: The password has to be entered first.

Display data screen 80.1 and select operating mode "Service".
80.1, Page 2/70

– Call up the appropriate test data screen (82.1 to 8n.n) that allows the function test to be performed.
82.1, Page 2/72

– Select the element to be tested.

– Select the desired function.
– Press the "ENTER" key to confirm your choice.
ENTER-key, Page 2/12

WARNING
This service function initiates immediate movement that might cause injury.
No person is permitted to be present in the hazard zone.

– Press the green "START" key.

The function is initiated. The data screen also shows the states of the sensors concerned and, if
necessary, whether the function has started (=1) or stopped (=0).
Note: Most functions stop immediately as soon as you release the "START" key. Otherwise the function
can always be stopped by pressing the "STOP" key.

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 2 / 37

Operation
Operation

2.4.18 Setting the brightness of the display

If the display is difficult to read or if some dark areas are visible, this can be improved by adjusting the bright-
ness.
Steps
– Press the "MAIN MASK" key (1)
simultaneously with the "DISPLAY forward"
key (4).
The mask gets lighter.
BASIC display key, Page 2/13
DATA-DISPLAY-key-forward, Page 2/13

– Press the "MAIN MASK" key (1)

simultaneously with the "DISPLAY back" key
(3).
The mask gets darker.
BASIC display key, Page 2/13
DATA-DISPLAY-key-back, Page 2/13

2.5 Electronic documentation (e-DOC)

2.5.1 Navigating through the e-DOC (electronic documentation) program

Finding information on the contents of e-DOC

– Information on the contents of e-DOC can be found in “Manuals and diagnostics” (1)
Note: The e-DOC program contains the following technical documents relevant to the machine: Operat-
ing manual, troubleshooting information, spare parts catalogue and spare parts ordering information, op-
erating manuals in PDF format, spare parts catalogues and electrical documentation, marketing informa-
tion, training information and forms.

– The following actions are possible: 1. Ordering of spare parts 2. Retrieval of information on the fitting
and removal of spare parts 3. Retrieval of information on rectifying faults 4. Search for technical terms.

2 / 38 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Operation
 Operation

2.5.2 Opening e-DOC

– Select the appropriate drive (2) and open e-DOC (1).

Note: The relevant (country-dependent) WINDOWS operating system has to be used to open the e-DOC
program, so that the lines are displayed correctly.

2.5.3 Selecting the language and accepting the licence agreement

– Select the language for the e-DOC program (1).

– Read and accept the licence agreement (2).

2.5.4 Opening the home page

– Select the machine type (1) and the machine number (2).

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 2 / 39

Operation
Operation

2.5.5 Opening the “Settings” menu and entering data

– Select the languages for dialogue and content, the spare parts catalogue and the operating manual (1).

– Select a limit for the number of search results (2).

– Make modifications to the output display format (3).

– Enter customer data for orders (4).

– Match machine data (5).

– Install the ISOView program (6).

– Click on OK to confirm the settings (7).

2 / 40 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Operation
 Operation

2.5.6 Entering ordering address

– Enter ordering address (1) and billing address (2).

– Click on OK to confirm the data (3).

2.5.7 Entering recipient’s address

– Enter the recipient’s address, the supplier number and further order-related details (1).

– Click on OK to confirm the data (2).

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 2 / 41

Operation
Operation

2.5.8 Opening the e-DOC overview screen

– Open the “Help” menu, if required, to bring up a description of the current page (1).

– Select the required technical document (2) (operating manual, troubleshooting information, spare parts
catalogue, spare parts ordering information)

– Select the required technical document in PDF format (3) (operating manual, spare parts catalogue, elec-
trical documentation)

– Select information (4) on marketing and training, and select forms

2.5.9 Opening the spare parts catalogue

– Click on the appropriate button to open the spare parts catalogue (1).

2 / 42 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Operation
 Operation

2.5.10 Navigating through the spare parts catalogue

– Navigate via full-text search (1), or through text (2) or images (3). To this end, open the selected sub-
assembly by double-clicking as appropriate.

2.5.11 Navigating through lower-level sub-assemblies in the spare parts

catalogue

– Navigate through the images (1). To this end, double-click the image.

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 2 / 43

Operation
Operation

2.5.12 Selecting spare parts for sub-assemblies

– Mark the reference numbers of spare parts (2) or select the spare parts from the table (3).

– Open the shopping basket (1).

2 / 44 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Operation
 Operation

2.5.13 Filling in the order form

– A separate order form has to be filled in for each spare part.

Note: The order form appears after the shopping basket is opened. The data for the selected spare part
is automatically added to the order form by the system (1).

– Enter the required quantity for the spare parts (2).

– Check the details on the order form and click on OK to confirm the order (3).
Note: After confirming the order, the spare part is “placed” in the shopping basket.

2.5.14 Saving the shopping basket information

– Check the shopping basket contents (2).

– Copy the shopping basket information to the clipboard (1).

– Save the shopping basket information via the “Save as ...” function (3) or the “Save” function (4).

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 2 / 45

Operation
Operation

2.5.15 Example of an order

– Check the data shown on the order form (1).

2.5.16 Switching from the spare parts catalogue to the operating manual

– Click on the appropriate button to switch from the spare parts catalogue to the operating manual (1).

2 / 46 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Operation
 Operation

2.5.17 Navigating through the operating manual

– Use the structure of the chapters to navigate through the operating manual (1).

– In the “Sub-assemblies” chapter, search according to handling instructions, e.g. fitting of spare parts (2).

– Switch to the spare parts catalogue (3).

2.5.18 Searching for handling instructions in the operating manual

– Read the handling instructions (e.g. for “Settings”) in the operating manual and then carry them out (2).

– Go back one page (1).

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 2 / 47

Operation
Operation

2.5.19 Opening the operating manual

– Click on the appropriate button to open the operating manual (1).

2.5.20 Navigating through the operating manual

– Navigate via full-text search (1), or through chapters, text (2) or images (3).

2.5.21 Opening the troubleshooting information page

– Click on the appropriate button to open the troubleshooting information page (1).

2 / 48 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Operation
 Operation

2.5.22 Entering the fault code

Procedure

– Enter the fault code or select from the list (1).

– Select suggestion (2).

2.5.23 Rectifying faults

– Read and then carry out the work instructions (1).

2.5.24 Directly opening the order form for spare parts

– Click on the appropriate button to open the order form for spare parts (1).

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 2 / 49

Operation
Operation

2.5.25 “Filling” and “saving” the shopping basket

– Enter the information for spare parts in the order form (1). Enter the data manually.

– Save the shopping basket information (2).

2.5.26 Closing the e-DOC program

– Click on the appropriate button to close the e-DOC program (1).

2 / 50 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Operation
 Display screens Operator panel

3 Display screens Operator panel

3.1 Structure of menu and data screens

The screen indicates which keys can be used to select the various screens on the display unit.
There are 3 types of displays:
Main screen (1):
Either an overview display or an error message will be shown if an error prevails. There might be more than
one overview display or more than one error at the same time.
Menu overview (2):
Data displays are grouped in menus. From the menu overview the requested menu may be selected
Data screen (3):
In data displays, actual values are shown, settings are changed, and test functions are started.
Fault screen:
In the event of a fault, the corresponding fault screen is shown on the main screen. The description of the
fault is indicated at the top. The fault code, the approximate location on the machine and the particular fault
among the impending faults (e.g. 2.of 3 : 2/3) are displayed on the left. The exact location is indicated by a
flashing rectangle on the large screen.
Overview screen:
If there is no pending fault, the overview screen, containing the most important current data of the machine, is
displayed. There may be several overview screens. In data screen 40.2, the overview screen that is normally
displayed can be configured.

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 2 / 51

Operation
Display screens Operator panel

3.2 List of menu and data screens

No. Menu /data screens Authorization Page
10 10 Production 2/58
10.1 Settings Change with 2/58
password
10.1 Settings Change with 2/59
password
10.2 Efficiency Change with 2/60
password
11 11 Machine functions 2/61
11.1 Machine functions No password 2/61
30 30 Information, general 2/61
30.1 Machine information No 2/61
password/Change
in service mode
30.2 Actual values for mixer No password 2/62
30.3 Actual values for feed module No password 2/62
30.4 Input overview No password 2/63
30.5 Outputs: No password 2/63
30.6 Frequency converter No password 2/63
31 31 Information protocols / statistics 2/64
31.1 Current warnings 2/64
31.2 Current maintenance warnings No password 2/64
31.3 Current malfunctions 2/64
31.4 Events occurred No password 2/65
31.5 Event statistics 2/65
31.6 Delete protocols / statistics Change with 2/65
password
40 40 Setup values, general 2/66
40.1 Date / times Changing settings 2/66
(password/service
mode)
40.2 Languages Change with 2/66
password
40.3 Setup values pressure Change with 2/67
password
40.4 Setup values for mixer Change with 2/67
password
40.5 Set-up values for feed module Change with 2/68
password
41 41 Setup values, configurations 2/69
41.1 Configurations Change in “Ser- 2/69
vice mode”
80 80 Operating mode 2/70
80.1 Switch operating mode Change (mainten- 2/70
ance)

2 / 52 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Operation
 Display screens Operator panel

No. Menu /data screens Authorization Page

81 81 IO tests 2/71
81.1 Inputs Change in “Ser- 2/71
vice mode”
81.2 Outputs Change in “Ser- 2/71
vice mode”
82 82 Functional tests 2/72
82.1 Conveyor belt, M21 Change in “Ser- 2/72
vice mode”
82.4 Take-off roller, M24 Change in “Ser- 2/73
vice mode”
82.5 Electric Travel cylinder M25 Change in “Ser- 2/73
vice mode”
82.10 Electric Travel cylinder M33 Change in “Ser- 2/74
vice mode”
82.11 Electric Travel cylinder M34 Change in “Ser- 2/75
vice mode”
82.12 Distribution cylinder, Y1 Change in “Ser- 2/75
vice mode”
83 83 Endurance test 2/76
83.1 Endurance test Change in “Ser- 2/76
vice mode”
84 84 General test 2/76
84.1 Push-button and LED test Change (mainten- 2/76
ance)

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 2 / 53

Operation
Display screens Operator panel

3.3 Overview screen

Example of a message display
One or several messages (malfunctions, warnings,
events) are displayed on the display unit in the form
of text and diagrams. If there are several
messages pending simultaneously, these can be
displayed individually.

1 Designation of the message.

2 Message code (e.g. error number).

3 Indicates graphically the general location of the

event in the machine.

4 Shows the order and number of current

messages.
Example 2/3: The second message of a total of
three sequential messages is currently shown.

5 Shows the exact location of an event. The loc-

ation on the machine is highlighted by a flashing
rectangle.

6 ACKNOWLEDGE key: For acknowledging the

current fault.

7 HELP key:to show additional help for the

displayed event.

8 MENU key: to display the menu overview.

9 PASSWORD key: to display the password entry.

10 Mask back key:displays the previous message,

if several events are reported.

11 MASK forward: displays the next message, if

several events are reported.

2 / 54 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Operation
 Display screens Operator panel

Overview screen for UNImix with R/S module

If there are no faults pending, the following overview screen is displayed first.

1 Screen number

2 Storage unit fill level (100 % => storage unit full)

3 Solid arrow => material is being requested.

4 Opening roller: “0” indicates no motion, “1” indicates motion.

5 Feed fan is running.

6 Direction of rotation for the opening roller.

7 Spiked lattice: “0” indicates no motion, “1” indicates motion.

8 Take-off roller: “0” indicates no motion, “1” indicates motion.

9 Possible displays.

9.1 No network connection.

9.2 Network connection is OK.

9.3 Maintenance warning.

10 “Stop-go” percentage

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 2 / 55

Operation
Display screens Operator panel

11 Fill level in chute.

12 Compression rollers: “0” indicates no motion, “1” indicates motion.

13 Solid arrow => material is being delivered.

14 Information line

15 Opening roller: “0” indicates no motion, “1” indicates motion.

16 Feed belt: “0” indicates no motion, “1” indicates motion.

17 Symbol no longer displayed: The fill level is below the minimum acceptable level.

18 Symbol is displayed: The limit switch for monitoring the position of the retaining rake has been triggered,
i.e. the material has not been compacted sufficiently.

19 Symbol no longer displayed: The dynamic storage unit fill level is below the minimum acceptable value.

2 / 56 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Operation
 Display screens Operator panel

UNImix B 72 / B 76 with R/S module (optionally with foreign fibre separator, as well)
This screen is displayed, if a foreign fibre separator is available.

1 Symbol for foreign fibre separator

UNImix B 72 with R/S module and active bypassing

This screen is displayed, if the bypass feature is active.

1 If the bypass mechanism is activated, the opening roller, feed rollers and compression rollers are stopped.

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 2 / 57

Operation
Display screens Operator panel

3.4 Menu 10: "10 Production"

Contains all production data for the machine but not shift-related data.

10.1 Settings
Adjusting the grating (waste volume
rate), Page 6/70
This screen only appears if the “VarioSet” program-
ming option has been set in data screen 40.5.
Production level
Enter the required level. A higher value results in
greater production and vice versa.
Default : 50
min. - max.: 20 (minimum production) - 100 (max-
imum production)

Fwd. running
When running in the forward direction, the opening
roller conveys material in the same direction as the
spiked lattice.
Results in coarser opening of material but a higher
production rate.
min. - max.: 500 - 610 min-1

Rev. running
Results in finer opening of material but a lower pro-
duction rate.
min. - max.: 70 - 150 min-1

Opening, mixer
The degree of opening is directly related to the dis-
tance between the spiked lattice and the opening
roller.
0.1 => lowest possible degree of opening, greatest
possible distance between the opening roller and
the spiked lattice, large tufts, fully extended piston.
1.0 => highest possible degree of opening, smallest
possible distance between the opening roller and
the spiked lattice, small tufts, fully retracted piston.
Default : 0.5
min. - max.: 0.1 - 1.0

Intensity
The degree of opening of the material is affected
by the speed of the opening roller. (1.0 => highest
degree of opening, i.e. highest speed of opening
roller.)
Default : 0.3
min. - max.: 0.1 - 1.0

2 / 58 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Operation
 Display screens Operator panel

Waste rate
The type and volume of waste is affected by the
grating setting. (10 => largest opening of the
grating, and hence greatest volume of waste. The
composition of the waste must be taken into
account when making the setting.)
Default : 5
min. - max.: 1 - 10

10.1 Settings
Adjusting the grating (waste volume
rate), Page 6/70
This screen only appears if the “VarioSet” program-
ming option has not been set in data screen 40.5.
Production level
Enter the required level. A higher value results in
greater production and vice versa.
Default : 50
min. - max.: 20 (minimum production) - 100 (max-
imum production)

Fwd. running
When running in the forward direction, the opening
roller conveys material in the same direction as the
spiked lattice.
Results in coarser opening of material but a higher
production rate.
min. - max.: 500 - 610 min-1

Rev. running
Results in finer opening of material but a lower pro-
duction rate.
min. - max.: 70 - 150 min-1

Opening, mixer
The degree of opening is directly related to the dis-
tance between the spiked lattice and the opening
roller.
0.1 => lowest possible degree of opening, greatest
possible distance between the opening roller and
the spiked lattice, large tufts, fully extended piston.
1.0 => highest possible degree of opening, smallest
possible distance between the opening roller and
the spiked lattice, small tufts, fully retracted piston.
Default : 0.5
min. - max.: 0.1 - 1.0

Opening, feed
The speed of the opening roller can be altered with
the PLUS and MINUS buttons.
Default : 600 min-¹
min. - max.: 500 - 1000 min-¹

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 2 / 59

Operation
Display screens Operator panel

Position of grid
The type and volume of waste is affected. (Set the
grating manually.)
Default : 55 mm
min. - max.: 5 - 100 mm

10.2 Efficiency
StopGo
The continuously-calculated percentage
corresponding to the ratio of the total durations
over which material is requested and is not
requested, and based on the last 15 minutes at any
given instant.
If the “stop-go” percentage is too low, the mater-
ial delivery rate is too high. Reduce the production
level.
10.1, Page 2/59

Machine efficiency:
Continuously-calculated machine efficiency. (Cal-
culation period in hours indicated in brackets.)

MTBA:
The calculation is performed continuously over 7
days. During this time period, the normal running
time is continuously compared with the number of
faults and evaluated. (MTBA = Mean Time
Between Assistance)

deleted on:
The date and the time indicate when the recording
was last deleted.

deleted on:
Yes: The values are reset.

2 / 60 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Operation
 Display screens Operator panel

3.5 Menu 11: "11 Machine functions"

contains shift related production data, such as efficiency and production

11.1 Machine functions

Production
The machine is producing.

Machi. emptying
The machine can be emptied by activating this
function.
The operating unit has a key which performs the
same function.

Module emptying
The machine can be emptied by activating this
function.
The operating unit has a key which performs the
same function.

3.6 Menu 30: "30 Information, general"

Contains information on machine type, software release, statuses of the inputs and outputs.

30.1 Machine information

Information on the machine
Machine type:
Type designation based on the configuration in
data screen 41.1.

Program release:
The program release used will be displayed.

Network address:
The network address for the corresponding ma-
chine is displayed.
If no network card is present, then the address
“000” is displayed.

Year of construction:
The year of construction for the machine is entered
by Rieter prior to delivery.
Following a change of software, entries can only be
made in “Service mode”, .
80.1, Page 2/70

Serial number:
The serial number of the machine is entered by Ri-
eter prior to delivery.

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 2 / 61

Operation
Display screens Operator panel

The serial number uniquely identifies a machine

and is important for orders.
Following a change of software, entries can only be
made in “Service mode”, .
80.1, Page 2/70

30.2 Actual values for mixer

Current values of various machine elements
storage quantity:
The current fill level of the storage unit (measured
by pressure sensors).
100% => storage unit full

Speeds

Conveyer belt M21:

The speed is displayed in rpm.

spiked feed lattice M22:

The speed is displayed in rpm.

Opening roller, M23

The speed is displayed in rpm.

Pos. of elec. cyl., M25:

The position of the electric cylinder is displayed in
mm.

30.3 Actual values for feed module

Feed rollers, M31:
The speed of the feed rollers is displayed.

Opening roller, M32:

The speed of the opening roller is displayed.

Comp. roller, M37:

The speed of the compression rollers is displayed.

Position of grid M33

Left-hand side of machine: The position of the
electrical-cylinder piston rod for setting the grating
is displayed. (Current and target values.)

2 / 62 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Operation
 Display screens Operator panel

Position of grid M34

Right-hand side of machine: The position of the
electrical-cylinder piston rod for setting the grating
is displayed. (Current and target values.)

30.4 Input overview

The status of each control unit input can be
checked (“0” indicating no voltage and “1”
indicating voltage is present) with this data screen.
Module:
Press the + or - keys to choose the I/O module, for
which the statuses of the individual inputs are to be
displayed.

Inputs:
For each input, the status “0” denoting “low” (no
voltage present) or “0” denoting “high” (voltage
present) is displayed.

30.5 Outputs:
The status of each control unit output can be
checked (“0” indicating no voltage and “1”
indicating voltage is present) with this data screen
Module:
Press the + or - keys to choose the I/O module, for
which the statuses of the individual outputs are to
be displayed.

Outputs:
For each output, the status “0” denoting “low” (no
voltage present) or “0” denoting “high” (voltage
present) is displayed.

30.6 Frequency converter

Setting the T1000V frequency
converter, Page 6/92
The software versions of the frequency converters
and the CAN communications cards are displayed.

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 2 / 63

Operation
Display screens Operator panel

3.7 Menu 31: "31 Information protocols / statistics"

contains protocols and statistics

31.1 Current warnings

All current warnings are displayed chronologically
with code, message text (summary) and date/time
of occurrence.

31.2 Current maintenance warnings

Currently pending maintenance warnings are dis-
played chronologically with code, message text
(brief summary) and entry date/time. The machine
production will not be interrupted.
Deleting warnings
Warnings that are no longer pending are deleted
automatically.

31.3 Current malfunctions

A maximum of 100 currently pending faults are dis-
played chronologically with code, text message
(brief summary) and date/time of occurrence.

2 / 64 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Operation
 Display screens Operator panel

31.4 Events occurred

A maximum of 100 most recent events, such as
faults, warnings, maintenance warnings,
messages, etc., are displayed chronologically with
code, message text (brief summary), entry
date/time and duration (h:m:s).
Entries
If 100 entries are recorded, the oldest entry will al-
ways be overwritten.

31.5 Event statistics

List of the most important events (alarms and mes-
sages) and information on how often these events
have occurred. Only those events that have oc-
curred at least once since the last delete are dis-
played. The entries in the events counter can be
deleted in data screen 31.6.

31.6 Delete protocols / statistics

Allows log files to be deleted in data screen 31.5.

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 2 / 65

Operation
Display screens Operator panel

3.8 Menu 40: "40 Setup values, general"

Furnishes settings, such as time, units, and languages.

40.1 Date / times

Changing from standard time to summer time
, Page 2/36
Time in:
For switching between summer time and standard
time

Time:
Enter hours/minutes

Date:
Enter day/month/year

Operating hours:
Setting the CPU operating hours counter, e.g. after
replacing the CPU or a loss of data.
Following a change of software, entries can only be
made in “service mode”, .
80.1, Page 2/70

40.2 Languages
Change the language, Page 2/28
The required languages are selected with "Yes".
These languages can then be selected via the
“LANGUAGE SELECTION” button. English and
German cannot be deactivated.

2 / 66 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Operation
 Display screens Operator panel

40.3 Setup values pressure

Adjust the pressure sensor, Page 6/25
Pressure with full storage
Maximum fill level of the storage unit. If exceeded,
the “Request Material” system signal is reset.

actual pressure:
Current pressure in the storage unit.

requesting material
Fill level, at which the machine again requests ma-
terial. If the storage unit is full, the “Request Mater-
ial” signal is reset.
100% => full storage unit
Default : 90 %
min. - max.: 50 - 99 %

ready for production

Fill level, at which the machine can produce again
(full storage unit). Only after the start procedure.
100% => full storage unit
Default : 50 %
min. - max.: 50 - 100 %

40.4 Setup values for mixer

Setting the distributor flap , Page 6/24
Conveyor belt control

Automatic
The ratio of the speeds of the feed belt and the
spiked lattice is constant.
Default : 85 %
min. - max.: 75 - 90 %

Manual
The feed belt speed can be entered manually.
Default : 80 %
min. - max.: 5 - 100 %

Speed of the opening roller when running in the

reverse direction
min. - max.: 70 - 610 min-1

Speed of the opening roller when running in the

forward direction
min. - max.: 70 - 610 min-1

Filling dispersion

right:

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 2 / 67

Operation
Display screens Operator panel

left:
The filling process can be affected on the right/left
by the flap (relevant to the B 76 only).
Default : 50 %
min. - max.: 20 - 80 %

40.5 Set-up values for feed module

Light barriers, Page 6/50
VarioSet
Normally, VarioSet is used
“Yes”: VarioSet is active.
“No”: VarioSet is not active.

Draft
The draft between the compression rollers and the
feed rollers can be adjusted.
Default : 1.5
min. - max.: 1.4 - 1.8

Requires material delayed

Default : 10 s
min. - max.: 1 - 100 s

Disturbance by minimum filling

Default : 60 s
min. - max.: 1 - 100 s

Production factor
In order to guarantee that the filling of the feed
chute in the module is as uniform as possible, the
production rate of the module can be increased or
reduced if required. (Low value => reduced
production rate for module.)
Default : 1.0
min. - max.: 0.5 - 2.0

2 / 68 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Operation
 Display screens Operator panel

3.9 Menu 41: "41 Setup values, configurations"

Configuration of the machine parameters.

41.1 Configurations
Changes are only possible in “Service mode”, data
screen 80.1
Machine type:
Select the machine type according to the name-
plate.

Network
Select “No”. (The machine is not connected to a
network. No display on data screen 30.1.)
Select “Yes”. (The machine is not connected to a
network. Display on data screen 30.1.)
The address is set at the control unit. The address
can be seen in the electric circuit diagram. (Ether-
net interface display on data screen 30.1.)

Feed module
Select “Yes”.
If “No”. is entered, the following text will not be dis-
played.

Supply
Determine the type of machine control unit that
controls the feeding of material to the next machine
downstream.

StopGo
The feed rollers in the UNImix are switched on or
off via a pressure switch in the downstream ma-
chine. Select this type of machine control unit if
the machine is not used for feeding the cards or for
production rates of less than 300 kg/h.

4 levels
Select this type of machine control unit if the UNI-
control is used as the control unit in the blow room.
The feed rollers are switched on or off via a pres-
sure switch in the downstream machine and the se-
lected production level..
10.1, Page 2/59
These signals are analysed. The machine produc-
tion, for the selected production level, is adjusted
so that the activation and deactivation of the feed
roller is reduced to a minimum.
Calculations associated with this operating mode
are carried out via the UNIcontrol.

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 2 / 69

Operation
Display screens Operator panel

Cleaning
“Yes”: The machine is equipped with a cleaning
section in the vicinity of the opening roller.
“No”: The machine has no cleaning section in the
vicinity of the opening roller.(This can only be
bypassed using the system designed for this
purpose.)

Bypass
“Yes”: Can be bypassed.
“No”: Cannot be bypassed.

Foreign matter module

“Yes”: A module for detecting foreign matter is
available.
“No”: There is no module for detecting foreign mat-
ter.

3.10 Menu 80: "80 Operating mode"

Change of operating mode for maintenance functions.

80.1 Switch operating mode

Performing service functions, Page 2/37
Selection of the operating mode. We distinguish
between "Automatic mode" and "Service mode".
The machine can be started for production in
"Automatic mode". The "Service mode" is used for
maintenance and machine testing purposes.
"Service mode" has to be selected to permit access
the other data masks for maintenance and tests.
Operating mode:
The following operating modes can be selected.
Selection
Service mode: This enables you to access all func-
tions in the test menus.
Automatic mode: This allows just a few functions
which eliminates potential risks in the automatic
mode.

2 / 70 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Operation
 Display screens Operator panel

3.11 Menu 81: "81 IO tests"

The data screens in this menu allow the inputs and outputs of the control unit to be tested.

81.1 Inputs
Here the individual control unit inputs can be
tested. The individual inputs must be activated
externally, i.e. the elements must be operated
manually. The designation numbers of the
individual elements are found in the electrical
documentation. Select the input to be tested. The
status of the selected input is shown on the signal
lamp. This allows a person to test an input, e.g. by
covering the proximity switch.
Changes are only possible in “Service mode”, data
screen 80.1
Group:
First, select the group to which the input to be
tested is assigned.
Selection
Plant control
Machine
Mixer
Feed module
Bypass
Foreign matter module

Inputs
Choose the input to be tested from the selected
group.

State
“0” denotes “low”, i.e. there is no voltage present;
“1” denotes “high”, i.e. there is a voltage present.

81.2 Outputs
Here the individual control unit outputs can be
tested. The outputs have been divided into groups.
The relevant group is to be selected first, followed
by the output to be tested. The status of the
selected output is shown on the signal lamp. This
allows a person to test an input. Switch off the
motor protection switch device.
Changes are only possible in “Service mode”, data
screen 80.1
Group:
First, select the group to which the output to be
tested is assigned.
Selection
Plant control
Mixer
Feed module

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 2 / 71

Operation
Display screens Operator panel

Miscellaneous
Foreign matter module

Outputs:
Choose the output to be tested from the selected
group.

State
“0” denotes “low”, i.e. there is no voltage present;
“1” denotes “high”, i.e. there is a voltage present.

3.12 Menu 82: "82 Functional tests"

Allows for general function tests

82.1 Conveyor belt, M21

Performing service functions, Page 2/37
Changes are only possible in “Service mode”, data
screen 80.1. The number on the information line
indicates the current status of this element. The
signals indicated on the information line must be
correct.
Preparation
The emergency stop button has not been pressed.
The motor protection switch device is on.
The frequency converter has no faults.
The safety circuit must be active and closed.

Converter ON
Press the START button. The status changes to
“1”. The frequency converter is ready to be started.

Speed forward
Use the “+”/“-” buttons to enter the speed as a per-
centage (%) of the maximum speed.
If the selected speed is adopted after pressing the
START button, the motor will also start.

Frequency
The output frequency of the frequency converter is
displayed.

The function and procedure, described in data

screen 82.1, also apply to the following data
screens.

2 / 72 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Operation
 Display screens Operator panel

Spiked lattice, M22

Data screen 82.2

Opening roller, M23

Data screen 82.3

Compression roller M37

Data screen 82.7

Feed roller M31

Data screen 82.8

Opening roller M32

Data screen 82.9
No selection for direction of rotation

82.4 Take-off roller, M24

Changes are only possible in “Service mode”, data
screen 80.1. The number on the information line
indicates the current status of this element. The
signals indicated on the information line must be
correct.
Preparation
The emergency stop button has not been pressed.
The motor protection switch device is on.
The safety circuit must be active and closed.

Motor on
Press the START button. The status changes to
“1”.

The function and procedure, described in data

screen 82.4, also apply to the following data
screens.

Feed fan
Data screen 82.6

82.5 Electric Travel cylinder M25

Position of the opening roller to the spiked
lattice (standard setting), Page 6/43
The emergency stop button has not been pressed.
The safety circuit is closed. The first number on
the information line indicates the current status of
this element; the second number the target status.
Changes are only possible in “Service mode”, data
screen 80.1
This data screen also applies to the following
elements.

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 2 / 73

Operation
Display screens Operator panel

Function
Selection
Measuring travel distance: Must be carried out
after replacing the electric cylinder. After pressing
the START button, the position detection of the
electric cylinder is initialised. The piston rod is fully
extended and retracted.
Middle position: After pressing the START button,
the electric cylinder moves to the centre position.
extend: After pressing the START button, the elec-
tric cylinder extends.
retract: After pressing the START button, the elec-
tric cylinder retracts.

82.10 Electric Travel cylinder M33

Electric cylinder for the grating
setting, Page 6/73
The emergency stop button has not been pressed.
The safety circuit is closed. The first number on
the information line indicates the current status of
this element; the second number the target status.
Changes are only possible in “Service mode”, data
screen 80.1
Function
Selection
Measuring travel distance: Must be carried out
after replacing the electric cylinder. After pressing
the START button, the position detection of the
electric cylinder is initialised. The piston rod is fully
extended and retracted.
Middle position: After pressing the START button,
the electric cylinder moves to the centre position.
extend: After pressing the START button, the elec-
tric cylinder extends.
retract: After pressing the START button, the elec-
tric cylinder retracts.

2 / 74 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Operation
 Display screens Operator panel

82.11 Electric Travel cylinder M34

Electric cylinder for the grating
setting, Page 6/73
The emergency stop button has not been pressed.
The safety circuit is closed. The first number on
the information line indicates the current status of
this element; the second number the target status.
Changes are only possible in “Service mode”, data
screen 80.1
Function
Selection
Measuring travel distance: Must be carried out
after replacing the electric cylinder. After pressing
the START button, the position detection of the
electric cylinder is initialised. The piston rod is fully
extended and retracted.
Middle position: After pressing the START button,
the electric cylinder moves to the centre position.
extend: After pressing the START button, the elec-
tric cylinder extends.
retract: After pressing the START button, the elec-
tric cylinder retracts.

82.12 Distribution cylinder, Y1

Only applicable to B 76 machines
Changes are only possible in “Service mode”, data
screen 80.1. The number on the information line
indicates the current status of this element. The
signals indicated on the information line must be
correct.
Preparation
The emergency stop button has not been pressed.
The motor protection switch device is on.
The safety circuit must be active and closed.

Cylinder on
Press the START button. The pneumatic cylinder
is extended and retracted.

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 2 / 75

Operation
Display screens Operator panel

3.13 Menu 83: "83 Endurance test"

System tests, such as resetting all data to nominal values or activating a “cold start”.

83.1 Endurance test

This test is only required when carrying out the in-
ternal test procedure. All the drives are started sim-
ultaneously.
Changes are only possible in “Service mode”, data
screen 80.1
Endurance test ON
The machine must be completely empty.
Perform the test using the START / STOP buttons.

3.14 Menu 84: "84 General test"

84.1 Push-button and LED test
The push-buttons and LEDs can be tested in this
data mask.
Test mode:
If the test mode is set to "active", all the LEDs on
the operating unit light up.
The push-buttons on the operating unit can be
tested in addition. If a push-button is pressed, the
appropriate test mask has to react.

2 / 76 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Operation
 Display screens Operator panel

3.15 System functions

8.1 Cold start procedure
This mask appears on first commissioning, possibly
following a software upgrade, if the data in the
memory were erased or if an intentional cold-start
was initiated. First enter the password. You will
then be guided through all the necessary data
masks in which settings must be defined or
checked,.
Password:
Enter the appropriate 4-digit password using the
soft keys 0-4.
Then press the ">" key to go to the next mask.
Note: Press the "C" key to delete the password
code and re-enter it.

8.1 Cold start procedure

This mask appears after password entry.
660 press the "<" key
If you press the "<" key, you will be guided through
all the data masks in which the user has to make
entries.

8.1 Cold start procedure

This mask appears at the end of the cold start pro-
cess, after you have been taken through all the set-
tings. Follow the instructions in the lowermost line
to be able to start the machine afterwards.

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 2 / 77

Operation
Display screens Operator panel

9 Password entry
Certain entries and tests are possible in data
masks only if the password has been entered
previously. (Soft key "Key in basic mask).

9.1 Password change level 2

A new password can be assigned in this data
screen. If several passwords (“S2 to S3”) have
been assigned, several data screens will appear
(9.2 to 9.x).

9.5 Password change Master

A new master password may be assigned on this
mask.

2 / 78 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Operation
Part 3

Setting up, preparing, adjusting

Part / Page

1 Explanation on this section of the operating instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 1

2 Machine set up; optimise settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 3

No. of pages 12

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 3/I

Setting up, preparing, adjusting
3 / II UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1
Setting up, preparing, adjusting
Contents

Part / Page

1 Explanation on this section of the operating instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 1

2 Machine set up; optimise settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 3
2.1 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 3
2.1.1 Air conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 3
2.1.2 Standard mechanical configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 3
2.2 Production is not reached . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 3
2.2.1 Check settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 3
2.2.2 Storage bin not adequately filled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 3
2.3 Blockages in the machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 4
2.3.1 Irregular material layers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 4
2.3.2 Malfunctions in filling and emptying of the machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 4
2.3.3 Opening secured windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 4
2.4 Material transport in the storage area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 4
2.4.1 Conveyor belt is not running properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 4
2.5 Storage not adequately filled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 5
2.5.1 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 5
2.6 Open transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 5
2.6.1 Exhaust air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 5
2.7 Dynamic storage unit at spiked lattice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 5
2.7.1 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 5
2.8 Delivery section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 6
2.8.1 Spike lattice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 6
2.8.2 Spike(s) of lattice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 6
2.8.3 Take-off roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 6
2.9 Feed chute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 6
2.9.1 Material height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 6
2.9.2 Material feed for the module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 6
2.10 R/S module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 7
2.10.1 Opening roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 7
2.10.2 Feed rollers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 7
2.10.3 Compression rollers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 7
2.10.4 Grating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 7
2.10.5 Differential pressure switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 8
2.11 Loading software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 8
2.11.1 Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 8
2.12 Replacing the operating unit (including the control unit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 9
2.12.1 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 9
2.12.2 Installation, adding equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 9
2.12.3 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 9
2.12.4 Display brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 9
2.13 Working with the BuR basic module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 10
2.13.1 Basic module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 10

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 3 / III

Setting up, preparing, adjusting
 Part / Page

2.13.2 Working with parts of the basic module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 10

2.14 Replace the frequency converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 10
2.14.1 Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 10
2.14.2 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 10
2.15 CAN node module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 10
2.15.1 Switch settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 10
2.16 Decommissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 11
2.16.1 Measures to be taken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 11
2.17 Recommissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 11
2.17.1 Measures to be taken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 11
2.18 Disposal of Waste . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 11
2.18.1 Accident Prevention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 11
2.18.2 Operating Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 11
2.18.3 Dismantling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 11

3 / IV UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Setting up, preparing, adjusting
 Explanation on this section of the operating
instructions

1 Explanation on this section of the operating

instructions
What is Part 3 for?
Part 3 contains checklists and tables relevant to potential tasks, such as settings, optimisation, etc.
These checklists provide an overview of all tasks that have to be carried out, such as changing to a different
type of material, for instance.

What information is contained in Part 3?

The checklists contain all the work instructions on various work situations, with reference to the relevant
tables and detailed work descriptions.

When do you need to consult Part 3?

If the machine or plant has to be set up.
If there is a material change.
If the quality or productivity is to optimised.
If work needs to be carried out on certain components.

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 3/1

Setting up, preparing, adjusting
Explanation on this section of the operating in-
structions

3/2 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Setting up, preparing, adjusting
 Machine set up; optimise settings

2 Machine set up; optimise settings

2.1 Settings
2.1.1 Air conditions
– Set the air conditions.
Setting suction values, Page 6/10

2.1.2 Standard mechanical configuration

– After a machine part has been replaced, the default settings need to be re-configured.
Adjusting the distance between the conveyor belt and the spiked lattice (standard
setting), Page 6/21
Tension the spike lattice, Page 6/37
Tighten the toothed belt drive of spiked lattice, Page 6/39
Position of the opening roller to the spiked lattice (standard setting), Page 6/43
Tighten the V-belt, Page 6/46
Position of the opening roller to the spiked lattice (standard setting), Page 6/43
Distance of the Take-off Roller to the Spike Lattice, Page 6/48

2.2 Production is not reached

2.2.1 Check settings
– Match the opening of the material to the production
Stop production, Page 6/44

– Check the tension and running of the conveyor belt

Tension conveyor belt, Page 6/19
Aligning the conveyor belt, Page 6/20

– Check filling of the storage area.

Adjust the separating vanes, Page 6/27

2.2.2 Storage bin not adequately filled

– Adjust the separating vane correctly.
Adjust the separating vanes, Page 6/27

– Check the pressure conditions at the material feed and at the exhaust air.
Exhaust air, Page 6/28

– Check the setting of the pressure sensor.

Adjust the pressure sensor, Page 6/25

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 3/3

Setting up, preparing, adjusting
Machine set up; optimise settings

2.3 Blockages in the machine

2.3.1 Irregular material layers.
– Check the material layers. They can be seen in the window of the service door on the left side of the ma-
chine.
– Check the settings of the separating vanes.
Adjust the separating vanes, Page 6/27

– Check the vacuum in the area of the exhaust air.

Exhaust air, Page 6/28

– Check the fill height.

– Check the material opening and the production.

Stop production, Page 6/44

2.3.2 Malfunctions in filling and emptying of the machine

– Check the adjustment of the stripper comb
Adjust the stripper rake, Page 6/31

2.3.3 Opening secured windows

– The safety screws will be permanently damaged when removing a secured window. Use new safety
screws, when re-fitting the window.
Removing the windows, Page 6/9

2.4 Material transport in the storage area

2.4.1 Conveyor belt is not running properly
– Tension the conveyor belt
Tension conveyor belt, Page 6/19

– Align the conveyor belt

Aligning the conveyor belt, Page 6/20

– Tighten the drive chain of the conveyor belt

Tightening the chain, Page 6/22

– Conveyor belt is defective

Removing the conveyor belt, Page 6/14
Installing the conveyor belt, Page 6/16

– The cleaning unit for the conveyor belt is not cleaning correctly. Adjust or replace the cleaning unit.
Setting the cleaning unit for the conveyor belt, Page 6/18

3/4 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Setting up, preparing, adjusting
 Machine set up; optimise settings

2.5 Storage not adequately filled

2.5.1 Settings
– Adjust the separating vane correctly.
Adjust the separating vanes, Page 6/27

– Check the pressure conditions at the material feed and at the exhaust air.
Exhaust air, Page 6/28

– Check the setting of the pressure sensor.

Adjust the pressure sensor, Page 6/25

– Set the distributor flaps.

Setting the distributor flap , Page 6/24

2.6 Open transfer

2.6.1 Exhaust air
– Cone tube
Exhaust air, Page 6/28

2.7 Dynamic storage unit at spiked lattice

2.7.1 Settings
– Make the fill height and fill quantity settings for the dynamic storage unit.
Making fill height and fill quantity settings for the dynamic storage unit, Page 6/29

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 3/5

Setting up, preparing, adjusting
Machine set up; optimise settings

2.8 Delivery section

2.8.1 Spike lattice
– Replace the spiked lattice
Remove the spiked lattice., Page 6/32
Install the spiked lattice, Page 6/34

– Install the drive unit for the spiked lattice according to specifications.
Drive unit for spiked lattice, Page 6/38

– Check the slide elements for the spiked lattice. Replace, if necessary.
Checking slide elements, Page 6/35

– Fasten the guide rails in the correct position.

Fastening guide rails, Page 6/36

2.8.2 Spike(s) of lattice

– Replace individual spiked bars
Remove the spike lattice., Page 6/41
Install spike lattice, Page 6/42

2.8.3 Take-off roller

– Whenever the take-off roller is removed, the bearing races have to be positioned correctly.
Positioning the ball bearing races for the take-off roller, Page 6/47

2.9 Feed chute

2.9.1 Material height
– The material height in the feed chute is too high or too low.
Light barriers, Page 6/50

2.9.2 Material feed for the module

– The material feed to be opened and cleaned by the module must be adjusted according to the material
that is to be processed. If the material feed is too heavy, then this will adversely affect the running beha-
viour of the module.
Setting the feed chute walls, Page 6/51

3/6 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Setting up, preparing, adjusting
 Machine set up; optimise settings

2.10 R/S module

2.10.1 Opening roller
– Remove the opening roller
Removing the opening roller, Page 6/65

– Install the opening roller

Installing opening roller, Page 6/67

– Tighten the toothed belt

Controlling and tightening toothed belts, Page 6/68

– Correctly set the proximity switch.

Proximity switch for ascertaining the speed of the opening roller, Page 6/69

2.10.2 Feed rollers

– Set the distance between the feed roller and the opening roller. (Adapted to an individual assortment.)
Adjusting the distance between the feed and opening rollers, Page 6/64

– Remove the feed roller.

Removing feed roller, Page 6/59

– Install the feed roller.

Installing the feed roller, Page 6/61

– Tighten the chain.

Tighten chain, Page 6/63

2.10.3 Compression rollers

– Remove the compression rollers
Removing the compression roller, Page 6/53

– Install the compression roller.

Installing the compression roller, Page 6/56

2.10.4 Grating
– Adjust the waste flow rate.
Adjusting the grating (waste volume rate), Page 6/70

– Set the home position for the newly-fitted lifting rod following replacement.
Electric cylinder for the grating setting, Page 6/73

– Setting the waste flap

Setting the waste transport flap, Page 6/74

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 3/7

Setting up, preparing, adjusting
Machine set up; optimise settings

2.10.5 Differential pressure switch

– Set the minimum vacuums for waste extraction and material delivery.
Differential pressure switch, Page 6/52

2.11 Loading software

New software must be loaded. For example, if the operating unit (which also contains the control unit) of an-
other machine has been installed, or if a new version is to be loaded.

2.11.1 Software
– Load software on to the control unit.
Software exchange between memory card and control system, Page 6/81

3/8 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Setting up, preparing, adjusting
 Machine set up; optimise settings

2.12 Replacing the operating unit (including the control unit)

2.12.1 Removal
– Remove the operating unit.

– Remove the keyboard strip.

2.12.2 Installation, adding equipment

– Insert the keyboard strip into the operating unit, that is to be installed.
Change keyboard strip, Page 6/99

– Install the operating unit and make connections according to the diagrams and electrics documentation.
Inserting the modules and plugs on the operator panel, Page 6/97

– Load software on to the control unit.

Software exchange between memory card and control system, Page 6/81

2.12.3 Configuration
– Set the terminating resistor
Setting or wiring in the terminating resistors for the CAN-Bus., Page 6/94

– Setting the node address

Set the CAN node address of the CAN I/O module CX408, Page 6/96

– Setting the IP address for the SPIDERweb option

Setting the IP address, Page 6/83

2.12.4 Display brightness

– Make setting.
Adjusting the contrast on the display unit, Page 6/98

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 3/9

Setting up, preparing, adjusting
Machine set up; optimise settings

2.13 Working with the BuR basic module

2.13.1 Basic module
– Perform a cold start
Carrying out a cold start, Page 6/79

2.13.2 Working with parts of the basic module

– Change the battery
Removing the battery from the control system, Page 6/80
Mounting the battery in the control system, Page 6/80
Change battery of control system, Page 6/80

– PCMCIA data storage card

Switch off write protection, Page 6/83
Software exchange between memory card and control system, Page 6/81

– Set IP address for Ethernet interface

Setting the IP address, Page 6/83

2.14 Replace the frequency converter

2.14.1 Equipment
– The device must be equipped with the relevant components.
Identifying the frequency converter, Page 6/84
Equipping the frequency converter, Page 6/89
Adapting to the cooling system, Page 6/91

2.14.2 Configuration
– The components must be configured appropriately.
Configuring the frequency converter, Page 6/90
Setting the T1000V frequency converter, Page 6/92

2.15 CAN node module

2.15.1 Switch settings
– Make settings
Set the CAN node address of the CAN I/O module CX408, Page 6/96

3 / 10 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Setting up, preparing, adjusting
 Machine set up; optimise settings

2.16 Decommissioning
2.16.1 Measures to be taken
– Bring the machine into its secure state.

– Disconnect the power supply.

– Protect the machine against unauthorized use.

– Secure the machine so that no one is placed at risk during the shutdown period.

– Protect the machine against contamination and corrosion.

2.17 Recommissioning
2.17.1 Measures to be taken
– Check all safety-relevant elements for proper functioning.

2.18 Disposal of Waste

2.18.1 Accident Prevention
Note: see "Workplace Safety" in Section 1
– The regulations relating to workplace safety must be absolutely complied with!

2.18.2 Operating Materials

– Ensure proper disposal of operating materials. Drain oil, coolant, etc.

2.18.3 Dismantling
Note: The following procedures may be done by trained specialists only who are familiar and comply with the
general safety regulations (see Section 1 and 6).
– The machine must be dismantled into units that can be safely transported.

– Hazardous machine parts that pose a risk during transport must be dismantled and safely packed.

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 3 / 11

Setting up, preparing, adjusting
Machine set up; optimise settings

3 / 12 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Setting up, preparing, adjusting
Part 4

Maintenance

Part / Page

1 Overview of special tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 1

2 Safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 3

3 Explanations for maintenance and intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 5

4 Maintenance schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 7

5 Cleaning / Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 11

6 Lubricant Manufacturer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 21

7 Standard lubricant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 23

8 Lubrication points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 25

No. of pages 26

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 4/I

Maintenance
4 / II UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1
Maintenance
Contents

Part / Page

1 Overview of special tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 1

2 Safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 3
2.1 Safety precautions during cleaning work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 3
2.2 Safety precautions during lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 3

3 Explanations for maintenance and intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 5

4 Maintenance schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 7
4.1 UNImix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 7
4.2 R/S module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 9

5 Cleaning / Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 11
5.1 UNImix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 12
5.1.1 Interval 165 Operating hours (Cyclic, repeat regularly): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 12
5.1.1.1 Cleaning the collecting duct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 12
5.1.1.2 Inspect and clean storage area and rollers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 13
5.1.2 Interval 2000 Operating hours (Cyclic, repeat regularly): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 14
5.1.2.1 Clean the separating vanes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 14
5.1.2.2 Lubricating bearings and chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 15
5.1.2.3 Cleaning the housing of the frequency converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 16
5.1.3 Interval 32000 Operating hours (Cyclic, repeat regularly): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 17
5.1.3.1 Changing lubricant for gear motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 17
5.2 R/S module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 18
5.2.1 Interval 2000 Operating hours (Cyclic, repeat regularly): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 18
5.2.1.1 Lubricating chains (R/S module) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 18
5.2.2 Interval 32000 Operating hours (Cyclic, repeat regularly): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 19
5.2.2.1 Change of lubricant in gear motors (R/S module) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 19

6 Lubricant Manufacturer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 21
7 Standard lubricant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 23
8 Lubrication points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 25

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 4 / III

Maintenance
4 / IV UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1
Maintenance
 Overview of special tools

1 Overview of special tools

Grease gun
Lubrication of lubricating nipple
Capacity per pump stroke 0.333 cm³

Note: The capacity without counter-pressure is 0.5

cm³

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 4/1

Maintenance
Overview of special tools

4/2 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Maintenance
 Safety precautions

2 Safety precautions
2.1 Safety precautions during cleaning work
Safety precautions
Switch off main switch Q10 and secure with padlock.
All jobs requiring these security measures are indicated by an appropriate symbol on the particular page.

Inflammable fuel
If inflammable cleaning agents are used in the spinning mill, their flash point should be above 55ºC.

2.2 Safety precautions during lubrication

Remove any drops of oil and other lubricants on the floor immediately to prevent all risk of slipping and falling.

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 4/3

Maintenance
Safety precautions

4/4 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Maintenance
 Explanations for maintenance and intervals

3 Explanations for maintenance and intervals

Maintenance necessity
Periodic maintenance is a prerequisite for long life time.
Periodic maintenance avoids unnecessary down time.

Maintenance targets
To keep equipment in good conditions with a minimum of problems .
To avoid interruptions by preventing measures

Pay backs of organised maintenance

Maintenance may be scheduled and labour requirements anticipated

Not sufficient maintenance or poorly organised maintenance:

Problems will arise at any time, avoidable loss of production will be encountered

Correct cleaning procedures

Cleaning must be done in a timely manner and at the right place

Correct lubrication procedures

Lubrication procedures must be done in a timely manner with proper lubricant at the right place and in the
right amount
To be able to lubricate properly it is necessary to have good equipment and exact operational scheduling
Preparations require that machines and equipment are in appropriate conditions
Personnel must be trained and familiar with the task on hand.

Adapt maintenance schedules to operating conditions

Maintenance schedules depend upon material, trash content, air condition, and operating conditions
The recommended maintenance schedules are mere proposals to be changed according to local conditions

Intervals
There are intervals which are valid either only once or at cyclical intervals
The unique ones are only to be used after the first installation and start-up. This can apply to the whole ma-
chine or to an individual element. For example, should a newly fitted belt needed to be re-stretched after a
certain running time.
Cyclical tasks must be performed repeatedly.
For example, after a running time of 660 hours, the 165, the 330 and the 660 maintenance work must be car-
ried out.
In 3 shift operation, the following intervals correspond to the quoted times.
165 operating hours = 1 week
330 operating hours = 2 weeks
660 operating hours = 4 weeks
2000 operating hours = 3 months
4000 operating hours = 6 months
8000 operating hours = 12 months

Maintenance planning
The maintenance schedule serves as overview for this.

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 4/5

Maintenance
Explanations for maintenance and intervals

The maintenance schedule is given in tabular form and lists the intervals at which the different maintenance
work is required.
The maintenance plan permits a detailed customer-specific maintenance schedule to be drawn up.
The work description is referenced for each piece of maintenance work.
For service specialists who carry this work out on a routine basis, this need to refer to a work description is no
longer necessary.
The tabulated column "Values" gives the service specialist details of the lubrication points.
The tabulated column "Values" contains a summary of the most important data on the corresponding lubrica-
tion points.
1. Location designation of the lubrication points
2. Number of lubrication points, for example the number of lubricating nipples = 8.
3. Lubricant information, e.g. EP2
4. Lubricant type, e.g. "grease"
5. Lubricant quantity, e.g. 3 pump strokes per lubricating nipple.

4/6 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Maintenance
 Maintenance schedule

4 Maintenance schedule
4.1 UNImix
Interval 165 Operating hours (Cyclic, repeat regularly):
Component name Task Values See
Frame and casing Cleaning the collecting duct 4/12
Frame and casing Inspect and clean storage 4/13
area and rollers.

Interval 2000 Operating hours (Cyclic, repeat regularly):

Component name Task Values See
Conveyor belt Tension conveyor belt 6/19
Conveyor belt drive Tightening the chain 6/22
Separating vanes Clean the separating vanes 4/14
Spike lattice Tension the spike lattice Distance between centres: 6/37
Distance between centres “A”: Upright
lattice tension 0.0 %
= 2483.0 mm
Distance between centres “A”: Upright
lattice tension 0.5 %
= 2495.0 mm
Distance between centres “A”: Upright
lattice tension 0.8 %
= 2502.0 mm
Spike lattice Checking slide elements 6/35
V-belt Tighten the V-belt 6/49
UNImix Lubricating bearings and Opening roller, 2 4/15
chains EP 2, Grease, 3 pump strokes
UNImix, Location number:
1, Page 4/25
Take-off roller, 2 4/15
EP 2, Grease, 3 pump strokes
UNImix, Location number:
3, Page 4/25
Conveyor belt chain, 1 4/15
CC320, EP oil, heavy, Lightly coat
UNImix, Location number:
5, Page 4/25
Conveyor belt chain, 1 4/15
S 21, Chain spray, Lightly spray
UNImix, Location number:
5, Page 4/25
Frequency converter Cleaning the housing of the 4/16
frequency converter

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 4/7

Maintenance
Maintenance schedule

Interval 4000 Operating hours (Cyclic, repeat regularly):

Component name Task Values See
Frequency converter Regenerating the replace- 6/84
ment frequency converter

Interval 32000 Operating hours (Cyclic, repeat regularly):

Component name Task Values See
UNImix Changing lubricant for gear Gear motor for spiked lattice, 1 4/17
motors CC220, EP oil, 180 cm³
UNImix, Location number:
2, Page 4/25
Gear motor for conveyor belt, Pre-stage 4/17
gearbox, “a”
S 26, Low-viscosity gearing grease, 175
g
UNImix, Location number:
4, Page 4/25
Gear motor for conveyor belt, Main 4/17
gearbox, “b”
S 26, Low-viscosity gearing grease, 600
g
UNImix, Location number:
4, Page 4/25
Frequency converter Replacing the frequency con- 6/85
verter

4/8 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Maintenance
 Maintenance schedule

4.2 R/S module

Interval 2000 Operating hours (Cyclic, repeat regularly):
Component name Task Values See
R/S module Lubricating chains (R/S mod- Chains for drives, . 4/18
ule) S 21, Chain spray, Lightly spray
R/S module, Location number:
1, Page 4/26
Chains for drives, . 4/18
CC320, EP oil, heavy, Lightly coat
R/S module, Location number:
1, Page 4/26

Interval 32000 Operating hours (Cyclic, repeat regularly):

Component name Task Values See
R/S module Change of lubricant in gear Pre-stage gearbox, a 4/19
motors (R/S module) S 26, Low-viscosity gearing grease,
0.175 l
R/S module, Location number:
2, Page 4/26
Main gearbox, b 4/19
S 26, Low-viscosity gearing grease, 0.6
l
R/S module, Location number:
2, Page 4/26

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 4/9

Maintenance
Maintenance schedule

4 / 10 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Maintenance
 Cleaning / Lubrication

5 Cleaning / Lubrication
Purpose of cleaning
Regular maintenance and constant cleaning of the machine contribute towards trouble-free operation.

Use of cleaning agents

Natural residue from cotton, such as honeydew, is best cleaned off with a cleaning rag and hand-warm water.
Residue from lubricants and deposits from synthetic fiber material are best cleaned with a solvent that does
not attack rubber and paint. e.g. use cleaning alcohol or water with a grease-dissolving general-purpose
cleaner
Use a high-powered industrial vacuum cleaner to remove dust and fly. The suction nozzle must be fitted with
a plastic tip.
After cleaning, the least volatile cleaning agents such as kerosine, white spirit, must be blown out of the anti-
friction bearings, using clean compressed air and without rotating the bearing.

Caution
Unauthorised conversions or modifications are not allowed, as there is then no guarantee that the machine
will function correctly.

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 4 / 11

Maintenance
Cleaning / Lubrication

5.1 UNImix
5.1.1 Interval 165 Operating hours (Cyclic, repeat regularly):

5.1.1.1 Cleaning the collecting duct

WARNING
Set the main switch to the “off” position and secure it with a lock.

– Open the doors (1) on both sides.

– Blow out material from the collecting duct (2) using compressed air.

4 / 12 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Maintenance
 Cleaning / Lubrication

5.1.1.2 Inspect and clean storage area and rollers.

WARNING
Set the main switch to the “off” position and secure it with a lock.

– Open all doors.

– Clean exhaust air chambers.

– Remove and clean the cleaning rod.

– Clean the inside of the conveyor belt

– Clean the inside of the spiked lattice.

– Clean the module, chain side and belt side.

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 4 / 13

Maintenance
Cleaning / Lubrication

5.1.2 Interval 2000 Operating hours (Cyclic, repeat regularly):

5.1.2.1 Clean the separating vanes

WARNING
Set the main switch to the “off” position and secure it with a lock.

– Check the separating vanes for fiber accumu-

lation (fiber tails) and clean, if required.

1 – Clean any fiber finish or honeydew residues

with a wet cloth.

4 / 14 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Maintenance
 Cleaning / Lubrication

5.1.2.2 Lubricating bearings and chains

WARNING
Set the main switch to the “off” position and secure it with a lock.

WARNING
1 Set the main switch to the “off” posi-
tion and secure it with a lock.

– Lubricate nipple (1).

Medium: EP 2
Quantity: 3 pump strokes
3 Location number: 1
Place: Opening roller

UNImix, Page 4/25

Grease gun, Page 4/1

– Lubricate nipple (3).

5 Medium: EP 2
Quantity: 3 pump strokes
Location number: 3
Place: Take-off roller
UNImix, Page 4/25
Grease gun, Page 4/1

– Lubricate chain (5).

Medium: CC320
Quantity: Lightly coat
Location number: 5
Place: Conveyor belt chain

UNImix, Page 4/25

– Lubricate chain (5).

Medium: S 21
Quantity: Lightly spray
Location number: 5
Place: Conveyor belt chain

UNImix, Page 4/25

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 4 / 15

Maintenance
Cleaning / Lubrication

5.1.2.3 Cleaning the housing of the frequency converter

WARNING
When the main switch is set to the
"on" position, elements downstream
of the main switch are live.
Injury due to electric shock.
Prior to commencing electrical install-
ation work, switch off the machine via
the main switch and secure the switch
with a padlock.
– Clean the entire surface of the housing with a
vacuum cleaner.

4 / 16 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Maintenance
 Cleaning / Lubrication

5.1.3 Interval 32000 Operating hours (Cyclic, repeat regularly):

5.1.3.1 Changing lubricant for gear motors

WARNING
Set the main switch to the “off” position and secure it with a lock.

– Remove contaminated lubricant by flushing out

the gearboxes of the motors

– Prerequisite: Do not mix different types of

lubricant.
2 Spiked-lattice drive unit: Lubricate the gear
motor (2).
Note: Ensure that gear motor is installed in the
correct position!
Medium: CC220
Quantity: 180 cm³
b a Location number: 2
Place: Gear motor for spiked
lattice
4 UNImix, Page 4/25

– Conveyor-belt drive unit: Fill the pre-stage

gearbox (a) with lubricant.
Medium: S 26
Quantity: 175 g
Location number: 4
Place: Gear motor for conveyor
belt
UNImix, Page 4/25

– Conveyor-belt drive unit: Lubricate the main

gearbox (b).
Medium: S 26
Quantity: 600 g
Location number: 4
Place: Gear motor for conveyor
belt
UNImix, Page 4/25

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 4 / 17

Maintenance
Cleaning / Lubrication

5.2 R/S module

5.2.1 Interval 2000 Operating hours (Cyclic, repeat regularly):

5.2.1.1 Lubricating chains (R/S module)

Spray

– Lubricate the chains (1) with a chain spray.

Medium: S 21
Quantity: Lightly spray
Location number: 1
Place: Chains for drives
R/S module, Page 4/26

– Oil the chains (1).

Medium: CC320
Quantity: Lightly coat
Location number: 1
Place: Chains for drives
R/S module, Page 4/26

4 / 18 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Maintenance
 Cleaning / Lubrication

5.2.2 Interval 32000 Operating hours (Cyclic, repeat regularly):

5.2.2.1 Change of lubricant in gear motors (R/S module)

WARNING
Set the main switch to the “off” position and secure it with a lock.

b a

– Rinse the soiled lubricant from the gearboxes of the motors (2).

– Prerequisite: Do not mix different types of lubricants.

Fill the pre-stage gearboxes (a) with lubricant.
Medium: S 26
Quantity: 0.175 l
Location number: 2
Place: Pre-stage gearbox

R/S module, Page 4/26

– Fill the main gearboxes (b) with lubricant

Medium: S 26
Quantity: 0.6 l
Location number: 2
Place: Main gearbox

R/S module, Page 4/26

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 4 / 19

Maintenance
Cleaning / Lubrication

4 / 20 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Maintenance
 Lubricant Manufacturer

6 Lubricant Manufacturer
Lubricant Manufacturer Name
EP 2 AGIP GR MU EP 2
AVIA AVIALITH 2 EP
BP ENERGREASE LS EP-2
CASTROL SPHEEROL EPL 2
ExxonMOBIL MOBILUX EP2
KLÜBER MICROLUBE GBU-Y 131
LAGERMEISTER LAGERMEISTER TS
OPTIMOL LONGTIME PD2
PETRO CANADA PRECISION GENERAL PURPOSE EP 2
SHELL ALVANIA EP (LF) 2
TEXACO MULTIFAK EP2
VALVOLINE MULTIPLEX SG - 2
CC320 AGIP BLASIA 320
AVIA AVIA GEAR RSX 320
BP ENERGOL GR.XP 320
CASTROL ALPHA SP 320
ExxonMOBIL MOBIGEAR 600 XP 320
KLÜBER KLÜBEROIL GEM 1 -320N
OPTIMOL OPTIGEAR BM 320
PETRO CANADA ENDURATEX EP 320
SHELL OMALA 320
TEXACO MEROPA 320
VALVOLINE EPG 320
S 21 CASTROL VISCOGEN KL 23
INTERFLON FOOD LUBE G 150 SPRAY
KLÜBER HOTEMP 2000 SPRAY
LUBCON TURMOFLUID 450 TURMOLYB MDC SPRAY
OPTIMOL VISCOGEN KL 23
PETRO CANADA PURITY FG SPRAY
VALVOLINE WHITE SYNTHETIC CHAINLUBE
CC220 AGIP BLASIA 220
AVIA AVIA GEAR RSX 220
BP ENERGOL GR-XP 220
CASTROL ALPHA SP 220
ExxonMOBIL MOBILGEAR 600 XP 220
KLÜBER KLÜBEROIL GEM 1 -220N
OPTIMOL OPTIGEAR BM 220
PETRO CANADA ENDURATEX EP 220
SHELL OMALA 220
TEXACO MEROPA 220
VALVOLINE EPG 220
S 26 AVIA AVIALITH 00/000 EP

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 4 / 21

Maintenance
Lubricant Manufacturer

Lubricant Manufacturer Name

S 26 BP ENERGREASE LS EP 00
CASTROL LONGTIME PD 00
ExxonMOBIL MOBILUX EP 004
KLÜBER MICROLUBE GB 00
PETRO CANADA PRECISION XL EP 00
SHELL ALVANIA GC 00
TEXACO TEXCLAD AI EP 00
VALVOLINE SEMI FLUID GREASE 00

4 / 22 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Maintenance
 Standard lubricant

7 Standard lubricant
Code Designation Viscosity DIN ISO Description
EP 2 Grease Viscosity of the base oil: KP2G-20 EP grease, lithium soap
100-250 mm2/s (51825) or equivalent thickener,
penetration; viscosity:
260 -310 mm2/s,
NLGI class 2.
Lead-soap-based or
phosphorus-sulphur-
based high-pressure
additives or equivalent
EP additives.
Ageing-protection and
anti-rust additives. Not
aggressive to bronze.
CC320 EP oil, heavy Viscosity (in mm2/s) at CLP 320 CC320 Paraffin-based oil, VI
40°C according to ISO (51517/3) ³ 90. No or insignific-
320 ant swelling of the o-
rings and other synthetic
rubber seals. Not ag-
gressive to bronze. Good
load-resistance capa-
city: FZG test load level
12, phosphorus-sulphur-
based high-pressure ad-
ditives or equivalent EP
additives.
S 21 Chain spray Synthetic lubricants spe-
cifically used for chain
lubrication. Extremely
pressure-absorbent sub-
stances, that are free of
solid matter and silicone,
form a highly-adhesive
lubrication film.
CC220 EP oil Viscosity (in mm2/s) at CLP220 CC220 Paraffin-based oil, VI
40°C according to ISO (51517/3) greater than 90. No or
220 insignificant swelling of
the o-rings and other
synthetic rubber seals.
Not aggressive to bronze.
Good load-resistance
capacity: FZG test load
level 12, phosphorus-
sulphur-based
high-pressure additives or
equivalent EP additives.
S 26 Low-viscosity gear- Penetration class Low-viscosity grease with
ing grease 00 high-pressure additives

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 4 / 23

Maintenance
Standard lubricant

4 / 24 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Maintenance
 Lubrication points

8 Lubrication points
UNImix

2
3

b a

5
4

Loc- Place Number Medium Quantity Special tools

ation
num-
ber
1 Opening roller 2 EP 2 3 pump strokes
2 Gear motor for spiked lat- 1 CC220 180 cm³
tice
3 Take-off roller 2 EP 2 3 pump strokes
4 Gear motor for conveyor Pre- S 26 175 g
belt stage
gear-
box, “a”
4 Gear motor for conveyor Main S 26 600 g
belt gear-
box, “b”
5 Conveyor belt chain 1 CC320 Lightly coat
5 Conveyor belt chain 1 S 21 Lightly spray

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 4 / 25

Maintenance
Lubrication points

R/S module

2/3

Loc- Place Number Medium Quantity Special tools

ation
num-
ber
1 Chains for drives . CC320 Lightly coat
1 Chains for drives . S 21 Lightly spray
2 Pre-stage gearbox a S 26 0.175 l
2 Main gearbox b S 26 0.6 l

4 / 26 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Maintenance
Part 5

Troubleshooting

Part / Page

1 Explanation on this section of the operating instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 / 1

2 Operator interface panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 / 3

3 Error not displayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 / 19

No. of pages 20

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 5/I

Troubleshooting
5 / II UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1
Troubleshooting
Contents

Part / Page

1 Explanation on this section of the operating instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 / 1

2 Operator interface panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 / 3
2.1 Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 / 3
2.2 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 / 17
2.3 Maintenance warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 / 18

3 Error not displayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 / 19

3.1 CAN IO module CX408 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 / 19
3.1.1 LED "status" on module CX408 does not light up green . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 / 19

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 5 / III

Troubleshooting
5 / IV UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1
Troubleshooting
 Explanation on this section of the operating
instructions

1 Explanation on this section of the operating

instructions
What is Part 5 for ?
Part 5 helps in discovering the cause of a fault and remedying it.

What information is contained in Part 5 ?

Part 5 lists the causes of faults and gives information about remedying them.

When does Part 5 need to be consulted?

When a fault is displayed on the machine with an error code or in the case of faults which cannot be recog-
nised by the machine.

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 5/1

Troubleshooting
Explanation on this section of the operating in-
structions

5/2 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Troubleshooting
 Operator interface panel

2 Operator interface panel

2.1 Malfunction
Code Designation Cause Remedy
Reaction/consequences
201 SW fault Internal monitoring of Contact Rieter
software has been Reveal the display text of Code 201 in
triggered. data screen 31.4
202 SW timeout Internal time-monitoring Contact Rieter
of software has been Reveal the display text of Code 202 in
triggered. data screen 31.4
203 Data initialized Triggers a cold start pro- Enter values into data screens during
cedure when started cold start
210 Emergency stop, control panel No response from EMER- Disengage the EMERGENCY STOP
S10 GENCY STOP button button
Check EMERGENCY STOP button and
wiring
211 Doors open Doors open Doors close
No signal from limit switch Check the functioning and connection
of the limit switch; replace, if necessary.
81.1, Page 2/71
212 Safety circ. relay triggered ON Fault Switch the main switch off and then on
K11 again
EMERGENCY STOP but- Check the functioning and connection
ton of the Emergency STOP button; re-
place, if necessary.
Attach the relay contacts Check functioning and setting
using adhesive
Safety switch Check the functioning and connection
of the safety switch; replace, if neces-
sary.
30.4, Page 2/63
213 Safety circ. relay trigger OFF Fault Switch the main switch off and then on
K11 again
EMERGENCY STOP but- Check the functioning and connection
ton of the Emergency STOP button; re-
place, if necessary.
Safety switch Check the functioning and connection
of the safety switch; replace, if neces-
sary.
30.4, Page 2/63
214 Hardware fault A11 Fault Switch the main switch off and then on
again
CAN bus, no communica- Check CAN bus wiring.
tion
Faulty hardware Check connections
Replace A11 module (electric circuit
diagram)

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 5/3

Troubleshooting
Operator interface panel

Code Designation Cause Remedy

Reaction/consequences
215 Hardware fault CAN-module Fault Switch the main switch off and then on
A20 again
DIP switches of CAN bus Set SW0 and SW1 DIP switches ac-
are incorrectly set cording to the electric circuit diagram
CAN bus, no communica- Check CAN bus wiring.
tion
24 V supply voltage unit Check wiring
is faulty
A 20 module is defective Replace A 20 module
216 Monitoring delivery suction B1 No vacuum Check fan
Pressure switch Correctly set the pressure switch
Check plastic pipe to pressure switch
Delivery section is Clear out material
blocked Correctly set the air volume rate
Check transport fan
Check motor and drives
217 Power supply F2 Automatic circuit breaker Check the setting for the automatic cir-
for the R/S module feed cuit breaker
has been triggered
220 Initialization, converter U21 Fault Switch the main switch off and then on
again
DIP switches for Set SW1, SW2 and SW3 DIP switches
frequency converter are according to the electrical circuit dia-
incorrectly set gram
CAN bus, no communica- Check CAN bus wiring.
tion
Frequency converter fault Check connections for frequency con-
has been detected verter
Replace frequency converter
221 Converter - type U21 Fault Switch the main switch off and then on
again
Incorrect type of Use a Rieter frequency converter.
frequency converter
222 Initialization, converter U22 Fault Switch the main switch off and then on
again
DIP switches for Set SW1, SW2 and SW3 DIP switches
frequency converter are according to the electrical circuit dia-
incorrectly set gram
CAN bus, no communica- Check CAN bus wiring.
tion
Frequency converter fault Check connections for frequency con-
has been detected verter
Replace frequency converter
223 Converter - type U22 Fault Switch the main switch off and then on
again

5/4 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Troubleshooting
 Operator interface panel

Code Designation Cause Remedy

Reaction/consequences
223 Converter - type U22 Incorrect type of Use a Rieter frequency converter.
frequency converter
224 Initialization, converter U23 Fault Switch the main switch off and then on
again
DIP switches for Set SW1, SW2 and SW3 DIP switches
frequency converter are according to the electrical circuit dia-
incorrectly set gram
CAN bus, no communica- Check CAN bus wiring.
tion
Frequency converter fault Check connections for frequency con-
has been detected verter
Replace frequency converter
225 Converter - type U23 Fault Switch the main switch off and then on
again
Incorrect type of Use a Rieter frequency converter.
frequency converter
230 cable rupture pressure sensor Pressure sensor has no Defective signal cable
B2 valid signal values Defective pressure sensor
Check wiring
231 excess pressure storage Pressure sensor signal Defective signal cable
value is too high Defective pressure sensor
Check pressure sensor wiring
232 Malfunction Feed fan Fan input is on Attach K1 relay contacts with adhesive
Broken wire, wiring fault
Check the wiring.
240 Overload conveyor belt Q21 Motor protection switches Switch on motor protection switch
Motor protection switches Set the rated current correctly (electric
circuit diagram)
No signal Check wiring and connections from mo-
tor protection switch, frequency con-
verter and motor
Supply voltage incorrect Check supply voltage
Current consumption Check current
Motor protection switches Check motor protection switch
Replace motor protection switch
Mechanical problems Check the rotating parts for ease of mo-
tion
Motor problems Clean motor
Check motor. (Bearing, coil, shaft.)
Check current consumption
241 Overtemperature conveyor belt Motor problems Clean motor
M21 Check motor. (Bearing, coil, shaft.)
Check current consumption
Mechanical problems Check the rotating parts for ease of mo-
tion

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 5/5

Troubleshooting
Operator interface panel

Code Designation Cause Remedy

Reaction/consequences
241 Overtemperature conveyor belt No signal Check wiring and connections from mo-
M21 tor protection switch, frequency con-
verter and motor
Supply voltage incorrect Check supply voltage
242 Overtemperature, converter Frequency converter Check installation of heat sink; also
U21 check it for dirt accumulation
Check functioning of cooling fan for fre-
quency converter
Motor problems Clean motor
Check motor. (Bearing, coil, shaft.)
Check current consumption
Temperature of the elec- Lower ambient temperature.
trical control cabinet is too
high
243 Overvoltage, converter U21 Supply voltage incorrect Check supply voltage
Frequency converter is Replace frequency converter
defective
244 Undervoltage, converter U21 Supply voltage incorrect Check supply voltage
Frequency converter is Replace frequency converter
defective
245 Overcurrent, converter U21 Motor problems Clean motor
Check motor. (Bearing, coil, shaft.)
Check current consumption
246 Overload, converter U21 Motor problems Clean motor
Check motor. (Bearing, coil, shaft.)
Check current consumption
247 Communication, converter U21 Fault Switch the main switch off and then on
again
DIP switches for Set SW1, SW2 and SW3 DIP switches
frequency converter are according to the electrical circuit dia-
incorrectly set gram
Frequency converter fault Check connections for frequency con-
has been detected verter
Replace frequency converter
248 Malfunction, converter U21 Frequency converter fault Check connections for frequency con-
has been detected verter
Replace frequency converter
249 Fault, converter U21 Frequency converter fault Check connections for frequency con-
has been detected verter
Replace frequency converter
250 Fault, converter U21 Frequency converter fault Check connections for frequency con-
has been detected verter
Replace frequency converter
260 Overload spiked feed lattice Motor protection switches Switch on motor protection switch
Q22 Motor protection switches Set the rated current correctly (electric
circuit diagram)

5/6 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Troubleshooting
 Operator interface panel

Code Designation Cause Remedy

Reaction/consequences
260 Overload spiked feed lattice No signal Check wiring and connections from mo-
Q22 tor protection switch, frequency con-
verter and motor
Supply voltage incorrect Check supply voltage
Current consumption Check current
Motor protection switches Check motor protection switch
Replace motor protection switch
Mechanical problems Check the rotating parts for ease of mo-
tion
Motor problems Clean motor
Check motor. (Bearing, coil, shaft.)
Check current consumption
261 Overtemp. spiked feed lattice Motor problems Clean motor
M22 Check motor. (Bearing, coil, shaft.)
Check current consumption
Mechanical problems Check the rotating parts for ease of mo-
tion
No signal Check wiring and connections from mo-
tor protection switch, frequency con-
verter and motor
Supply voltage incorrect Check supply voltage
262 Overtemperature, converter Frequency converter Check installation of heat sink; also
U22 check it for dirt accumulation
Check functioning of cooling fan for fre-
quency converter
Motor problems Clean motor
Check motor. (Bearing, coil, shaft.)
Check current consumption
Temperature of the elec- Lower ambient temperature.
trical control cabinet is too
high
263 Overvoltage, converter U22 Supply voltage incorrect Check supply voltage
Frequency converter is Replace frequency converter
defective
264 Undervoltage, converter U22 Supply voltage incorrect Check supply voltage
Frequency converter is Replace frequency converter
defective
265 Overcurrent, converter U22 Motor problems Clean motor
Check motor. (Bearing, coil, shaft.)
Check current consumption
266 Overload, converter U22 Motor problems Clean motor
Check motor. (Bearing, coil, shaft.)
Check current consumption
267 Communication, converter U22 Fault Switch the main switch off and then on
again

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 5/7

Troubleshooting
Operator interface panel

Code Designation Cause Remedy

Reaction/consequences
267 Communication, converter U22 DIP switches for Set SW1, SW2 and SW3 DIP switches
frequency converter are according to the electrical circuit dia-
incorrectly set gram
Frequency converter fault Check connections for frequency con-
has been detected verter
Replace frequency converter
268 Malfunction, converter U22 Frequency converter fault Check connections for frequency con-
has been detected verter
Replace frequency converter
269 Fault, converter U22 Frequency converter fault Check connections for frequency con-
has been detected verter
Replace frequency converter
270 Fault, converter U22 Frequency converter fault Check connections for frequency con-
has been detected verter
Replace frequency converter
271 automatic dechoking failed Machine still Blockage due to material
“overburdened” after 2 Check motor and drives
rectification attempts
280 Overload opening roller Q23 Motor protection switches Switch on motor protection switch
Motor protection switches Set the rated current correctly (electric
circuit diagram)
No signal Check wiring and connections from mo-
tor protection switch, frequency con-
verter and motor
Supply voltage incorrect Check supply voltage
Current consumption Check current
Motor protection switches Check motor protection switch
Replace motor protection switch
Mechanical problems Check the rotating parts for ease of mo-
tion
Motor problems Clean motor
Check motor. (Bearing, coil, shaft.)
Check current consumption
281 Overtemperature, opening Motor problems Clean motor
roller M23 Check motor. (Bearing, coil, shaft.)
Check current consumption
Mechanical problems Check the rotating parts for ease of mo-
tion
No signal Check wiring and connections from mo-
tor protection switch, frequency con-
verter and motor
Supply voltage incorrect Check supply voltage
282 Overtemperature, converter Frequency converter Check installation of heat sink; also
U23 check it for dirt accumulation
Check functioning of cooling fan for fre-
quency converter

5/8 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Troubleshooting
 Operator interface panel

Code Designation Cause Remedy

Reaction/consequences
282 Overtemperature, converter Motor problems Clean motor
U23 Check motor. (Bearing, coil, shaft.)
Check current consumption
Temperature of the elec- Lower ambient temperature.
trical control cabinet is too
high
283 Overvoltage, converter U23 Supply voltage incorrect Check supply voltage
Frequency converter is Replace frequency converter
defective
284 Undervoltage, converter U23 Supply voltage incorrect Check supply voltage
Frequency converter is Replace frequency converter
defective
285 Overcurrent, converter U23 Motor problems Clean motor
Check motor. (Bearing, coil, shaft.)
Check current consumption
286 Overload, converter U23 Motor problems Clean motor
Check motor. (Bearing, coil, shaft.)
Check current consumption
287 Communication, converter U23 Fault Switch the main switch off and then on
again
DIP switches for Set SW1, SW2 and SW3 DIP switches
frequency converter are according to the electrical circuit dia-
incorrectly set gram
Frequency converter fault Check connections for frequency con-
has been detected verter
Replace frequency converter
288 Malfunction, converter U23 Frequency converter fault Check connections for frequency con-
has been detected verter
Replace frequency converter
289 Fault, converter U23 Frequency converter fault Check connections for frequency con-
has been detected verter
Replace frequency converter
290 Fault, converter U23 Frequency converter fault Check connections for frequency con-
has been detected verter
Replace frequency converter
291 Overload take-off roller Q24 Motor protection switches Switch on motor protection switch
Motor protection switches Set the rated current correctly (electric
circuit diagram)
No signal Check wiring and connections from mo-
tor protection switch, frequency con-
verter and motor
Supply voltage incorrect Check supply voltage
Current consumption Check current
Motor protection switches Check motor protection switch
Replace motor protection switch

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 5/9

Troubleshooting
Operator interface panel

Code Designation Cause Remedy

Reaction/consequences
291 Overload take-off roller Q24 Mechanical problems Check the rotating parts for ease of mo-
tion
Motor problems Clean motor
Check motor. (Bearing, coil, shaft.)
Check current consumption
300 Hardware fault CAN-module Fault Switch the main switch off and then on
A30 again
DIP switches of CAN bus Set SW0 and SW1 DIP switches ac-
are incorrectly set cording to the electric circuit diagram
CAN bus, no communica- Check CAN bus wiring.
tion
24 V supply voltage unit Check wiring
is faulty
A 30 module is defective Replace A 30 module
301 Initialization, converter U31 Fault Switch the main switch off and then on
again
DIP switches for Set SW1, SW2 and SW3 DIP switches
frequency converter are according to the electrical circuit dia-
incorrectly set gram
CAN bus, no communica- Check CAN bus wiring.
tion
Frequency converter fault Check connections for frequency con-
has been detected verter
Replace frequency converter
302 Converter - type U31 Fault Switch the main switch off and then on
again
Incorrect type of Use a Rieter frequency converter.
frequency converter
303 Initialization, converter U32 Fault Switch the main switch off and then on
again
DIP switches for Set SW1, SW2 and SW3 DIP switches
frequency converter are according to the electrical circuit dia-
incorrectly set gram
CAN bus, no communica- Check CAN bus wiring.
tion
Frequency converter fault Check connections for frequency con-
has been detected verter
Replace frequency converter
304 Converter - type U32 Fault Switch the main switch off and then on
again
Incorrect type of Use a Rieter frequency converter.
frequency converter
305 Initialization, converter U37 Fault Switch the main switch off and then on
again
DIP switches for Set SW1, SW2 and SW3 DIP switches
frequency converter are according to the electrical circuit dia-
incorrectly set gram

5 / 10 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Troubleshooting
 Operator interface panel

Code Designation Cause Remedy

Reaction/consequences
305 Initialization, converter U37 CAN bus, no communica- Check CAN bus wiring.
tion
Frequency converter fault Check connections for frequency con-
has been detected verter
Replace frequency converter
306 Converter - type U37 Fault Switch the main switch off and then on
again
Incorrect type of Use a Rieter frequency converter.
frequency converter
310 Fill level too low B35 Material supply is too low Adjust material supply (preceding ma-
chine)
Production is too high Reduce machine or line production
Light barrier is defective Check the functioning of the light barrier
and replace, if necessary.
311 Filling B34/B35 The top light barrier is Clean the light barrier
permanently covered, the Remove fibre accumulations from the
bottom light barrier is not light barrier.
covered
Light barrier is defective Check the functioning of the light barrier
and replace, if necessary.
312 Waste disposal B33 Interval for waste suction Check waste transport
is too long
313 flap position B37/B38 Bypass flap is not in the Check flap position
correct position Check limit switches.
Check limit switches and their wiring.
320 Overload, feed rollers Q31 Motor protection switches Switch on motor protection switch
Motor protection switches Set the rated current correctly (electric
circuit diagram)
No signal Check wiring and connections from mo-
tor protection switch, frequency con-
verter and motor
Supply voltage incorrect Check supply voltage
Current consumption Check current
Motor protection switches Check motor protection switch
Replace motor protection switch
Mechanical problems Check the rotating parts for ease of mo-
tion
Motor problems Clean motor
Check motor. (Bearing, coil, shaft.)
Check current consumption
321 Overtemperature, feed rollers Motor problems Clean motor
M31 Check motor. (Bearing, coil, shaft.)
Check current consumption
Mechanical problems Check the rotating parts for ease of mo-
tion

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 5 / 11

Troubleshooting
Operator interface panel

Code Designation Cause Remedy

Reaction/consequences
321 Overtemperature, feed rollers No signal Check wiring and connections from mo-
M31 tor protection switch, frequency con-
verter and motor
Supply voltage incorrect Check supply voltage
322 Overtemperature, converter Frequency converter Check installation of heat sink; also
U31 check it for dirt accumulation
Check functioning of cooling fan for fre-
quency converter
Motor problems Clean motor
Check motor. (Bearing, coil, shaft.)
Check current consumption
Temperature of the elec- Lower ambient temperature.
trical control cabinet is too
high
323 Overvoltage, converter U31 Supply voltage incorrect Check supply voltage
Frequency converter is Replace frequency converter
defective
324 Undervoltage, converter U31 Supply voltage incorrect Check supply voltage
Frequency converter is Replace frequency converter
defective
325 Overcurrent, converter U31 Motor problems Clean motor
Check motor. (Bearing, coil, shaft.)
Check current consumption
326 Overload, converter U31 Motor problems Clean motor
Check motor. (Bearing, coil, shaft.)
Check current consumption
327 Communication, converter U31 Fault Switch the main switch off and then on
again
DIP switches for Set SW1, SW2 and SW3 DIP switches
frequency converter are according to the electrical circuit dia-
incorrectly set gram
Frequency converter fault Check connections for frequency con-
has been detected verter
Replace frequency converter
328 Malfunction, converter U31 Frequency converter fault Check connections for frequency con-
has been detected verter
Replace frequency converter
329 Fault, converter U31 Frequency converter fault Check connections for frequency con-
has been detected verter
Replace frequency converter
330 Fault, converter U31 Frequency converter fault Check connections for frequency con-
has been detected verter
Replace frequency converter
331 Speed feed rollers too low Material wound around Remove wound material from roller and
roller clean the intermediate spaces

5 / 12 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Troubleshooting
 Operator interface panel

Code Designation Cause Remedy

Reaction/consequences
331 Speed feed rollers too low Mechanical problems Check the rotating parts for ease of mo-
tion
Motor problems Clean motor
Check motor. (Bearing, coil, shaft.)
Check current consumption
340 Overload, opening roller Q32 Motor protection switches Switch on motor protection switch
Motor protection switches Set the rated current correctly (electric
circuit diagram)
No signal Check wiring and connections from mo-
tor protection switch, frequency con-
verter and motor
Supply voltage incorrect Check supply voltage
Current consumption Check current
Motor protection switches Check motor protection switch
Replace motor protection switch
Mechanical problems Check the rotating parts for ease of mo-
tion
Motor problems Clean motor
Check motor. (Bearing, coil, shaft.)
Check current consumption
341 Overtemperature, opening Motor problems Clean motor
roller M32 Check motor. (Bearing, coil, shaft.)
Check current consumption
Mechanical problems Check the rotating parts for ease of mo-
tion
No signal Check wiring and connections from mo-
tor protection switch, frequency con-
verter and motor
Supply voltage incorrect Check supply voltage
342 Overtemperature, converter Frequency converter Check installation of heat sink; also
U32 check it for dirt accumulation
Check functioning of cooling fan for fre-
quency converter
Motor problems Clean motor
Check motor. (Bearing, coil, shaft.)
Check current consumption
Temperature of the elec- Lower ambient temperature.
trical control cabinet is too
high
343 Overvoltage, converter U32 Supply voltage incorrect Check supply voltage
Frequency converter is Replace frequency converter
defective
344 Undervoltage, converter U32 Supply voltage incorrect Check supply voltage
Frequency converter is Replace frequency converter
defective

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 5 / 13

Troubleshooting
Operator interface panel

Code Designation Cause Remedy

Reaction/consequences
345 Overcurrent, converter U32 Motor problems Clean motor
Check motor. (Bearing, coil, shaft.)
Check current consumption
346 Overload, converter U32 Motor problems Clean motor
Check motor. (Bearing, coil, shaft.)
Check current consumption
347 Communication, converter U32 Fault Switch the main switch off and then on
again
DIP switches for Set SW1, SW2 and SW3 DIP switches
frequency converter are according to the electrical circuit dia-
incorrectly set gram
Frequency converter fault Check connections for frequency con-
has been detected verter
Replace frequency converter
348 Malfunction, converter U32 Frequency converter fault Check connections for frequency con-
has been detected verter
Replace frequency converter
349 Fault, converter U32 Frequency converter fault Check connections for frequency con-
has been detected verter
Replace frequency converter
350 Fault, converter U32 Frequency converter fault Check connections for frequency con-
has been detected verter
Replace frequency converter
351 Speed opening roller too low Delivery section is Clear out material
blocked Correctly set the air volume rate
Check transport fan
Check motor and drives
Material wound around Remove wound material from roller and
roller clean the intermediate spaces
Mechanical problems Check the rotating parts for ease of mo-
tion
Motor problems Clean motor
Check motor. (Bearing, coil, shaft.)
Check current consumption
352 Speed monitor B32 Proximity switch is not Check setting and functioning of the
functioning correctly. proximity switch.
Check wiring.
Replace proximity switch
360 Overload, compression rollers Motor protection switches Switch on motor protection switch
Q37 Motor protection switches Set the rated current correctly (electric
circuit diagram)
No signal Check wiring and connections from mo-
tor protection switch, frequency con-
verter and motor
Supply voltage incorrect Check supply voltage
Current consumption Check current

5 / 14 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Troubleshooting
 Operator interface panel

Code Designation Cause Remedy

Reaction/consequences
360 Overload, compression rollers Motor protection switches Check motor protection switch
Q37 Replace motor protection switch
Mechanical problems Check the rotating parts for ease of mo-
tion
Motor problems Clean motor
Check motor. (Bearing, coil, shaft.)
Check current consumption
361 Overtemperature comp. rollers Motor problems Clean motor
M37 Check motor. (Bearing, coil, shaft.)
Check current consumption
Mechanical problems Check the rotating parts for ease of mo-
tion
No signal Check wiring and connections from mo-
tor protection switch, frequency con-
verter and motor
Supply voltage incorrect Check supply voltage
362 Overtemperature, converter Frequency converter Check installation of heat sink; also
U37 check it for dirt accumulation
Check functioning of cooling fan for fre-
quency converter
Motor problems Clean motor
Check motor. (Bearing, coil, shaft.)
Check current consumption
Temperature of the elec- Lower ambient temperature.
trical control cabinet is too
high
363 Overvoltage, converter U37 Supply voltage incorrect Check supply voltage
Frequency converter is Replace frequency converter
defective
364 Undervoltage, converter U37 Supply voltage incorrect Check supply voltage
Frequency converter is Replace frequency converter
defective
365 Overcurrent, converter U37 Motor problems Clean motor
Check motor. (Bearing, coil, shaft.)
Check current consumption
366 Overload, converter U37 Motor problems Clean motor
Check motor. (Bearing, coil, shaft.)
Check current consumption
367 Communication, converter U37 Fault Switch the main switch off and then on
again
DIP switches for Set SW1, SW2 and SW3 DIP switches
frequency converter are according to the electrical circuit dia-
incorrectly set gram
Frequency converter fault Check connections for frequency con-
has been detected verter
Replace frequency converter

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 5 / 15

Troubleshooting
Operator interface panel

Code Designation Cause Remedy

Reaction/consequences
368 Malfunction, converter U37 Frequency converter fault Check connections for frequency con-
has been detected verter
Replace frequency converter
369 Fault, converter U37 Frequency converter fault Check connections for frequency con-
has been detected verter
Replace frequency converter
370 Fault, converter U37 Frequency converter fault Check connections for frequency con-
has been detected verter
Replace frequency converter
371 Speed compression rollers too Material wound around Remove wound material from roller and
low roller clean the intermediate spaces
Mechanical problems Check the rotating parts for ease of mo-
tion
Motor problems Clean motor
Check motor. (Bearing, coil, shaft.)
Check current consumption
380 Malfunction Foreign matter Foreign-matter module See operating manual for foreign-matter
module fault module
381 Signalfault Foreign matter No signal Check wiring and connections
module Foreign-matter module See operating manual for foreign-matter
fault module
382 Overload Q2 No signal Check wiring and connections
Motor protection switches Switch on motor protection switch
Motor protection switches Check motor protection switch
Replace motor protection switch
Motor protection switches Set the rated current correctly (electric
circuit diagram)
Supply voltage incorrect Check supply voltage
Current consumption Check current

5 / 16 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Troubleshooting
 Operator interface panel

2.2 Warning
Code Designation Cause Remedy
Reaction/consequences
550 opening roller position not The electric cylinder has Check wiring for electric cylinder.
reached not reached the target Check the mechanics for the grating
position within the pre- setting
scribed time.
552 Filling minimum Material supply is too low Adjust material supply (preceding ma-
chine)
Production is too high Reduce machine or line production
Light barrier is defective Check the functioning of the light barrier
and replace, if necessary.
553 Monitoring delivery suction No vacuum Check fan
Pressure switch Correctly set the pressure switch
Check plastic pipe to pressure switch
Delivery section is Clear out material
blocked Correctly set the air volume rate
Check transport fan
Check motor and drives
560 Minimal filling, R/S module Material supply is too low Adjust material supply (preceding ma-
chine)
Production is too high Reduce machine or line production
Light barrier is defective Check the functioning of the light barrier
and replace, if necessary.
562 Speed monitor opening roller Delivery section is Clear out material
blocked Correctly set the air volume rate
Check transport fan
Check motor and drives
Material wound around Remove wound material from roller and
roller clean the intermediate spaces
Mechanical problems Check the rotating parts for ease of mo-
tion
Motor problems Clean motor
Check motor. (Bearing, coil, shaft.)
Check current consumption
564 M33 Grid position not reached The electric cylinder has Check wiring for electric cylinder.
not reached the target Check the mechanics for the grating
position within the pre- setting
scribed time.
565 M34 Grid position not reached The electric cylinder has Check wiring for electric cylinder.
not reached the target Check the mechanics for the grating
position within the pre- setting
scribed time.
566 Waste disposal Interval for waste suction Check waste transport
is too long
570 Foreign matter module warning Warning display from Display with signal lamp
foreign-matter module See operating manual for foreign-matter
module

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 5 / 17

Troubleshooting
Operator interface panel

Code Designation Cause Remedy

Reaction/consequences
571 Foreign matter module swiched No “Power on” signal Switch on foreign-matter module
off from foreign-matter mod-
ule.

2.3 Maintenance warning

Code Designation Cause Remedy
Reaction/consequences
600 Data system, no ethernet mod- A18 Ethernet module is Replace A18 Ethernet module
ule A18 defective
A18 Ethernet module is Install A18 Ethernet module
missing
649 Replace battery Battery test mechanism Replace battery
has responded. Energy
of battery is too low or
battery is missing.

5 / 18 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Troubleshooting
 Error not displayed

3 Error not displayed

3.1 CAN IO module CX408
3.1.1 LED "status" on module CX408 does not light up green
Cause Remedy
CAN I/O module may be faulty Check module and possibly replace.
Checking CAN I/O module CX408, Page 6/95

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 5 / 19

Troubleshooting
Error not displayed

5 / 20 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Troubleshooting
Part 6

Description of machine subassemblies

Part / Page

1 Explanation on this section of the operating instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 1

2 Safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 3

3 Overview of special tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 5

4 UNImix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 7

5 Lower blend module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 13

6 Upper blend module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 23

7 Delivery section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 29

8 Control technique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 77

9 Operating and display elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 97

10 Torque standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 101

No. of pages 102

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 6/I

Description of machine subassemblies
6 / II UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1
Description of machine subassemblies
Contents

Part / Page

1 Explanation on this section of the operating instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 1

2 Safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 3
2.1 Safety precautions during dismantling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 3
2.2 Safety precautions during installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 3
2.3 Safety precautions during adjusting jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 3
2.4 Work safety for checking tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 3
2.5 Safety precautions during measuring jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 3

3 Overview of special tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 5

4 UNImix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 7
4.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 7
4.2 Removing the windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 9
4.3 Setting suction values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 10

5 Lower blend module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 13

5.1 Conveyor belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 13
5.1.1 Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 13
5.1.2 Removing the conveyor belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 14
5.1.3 Installing the conveyor belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 16
5.1.4 Setting the cleaning unit for the conveyor belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 18
5.1.5 Tension conveyor belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 19
5.1.6 Aligning the conveyor belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 20
5.1.7 Adjusting the distance between the conveyor belt and the spiked lattice (standard
setting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 21
5.1.8 Conveyor belt drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 22
5.1.8.1 Tightening the chain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 22

6 Upper blend module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 23

6.1 Material entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 23
6.1.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 23
6.1.2 Setting the distributor flap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 24
6.1.3 Adjust the pressure sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 25
6.2 Separating vanes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 26
6.2.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 26
6.2.2 Adjust the separating vanes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 27
6.3 Exhaust air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 28
6.3.1 Exhaust air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 28

7 Delivery section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 29
7.1 Making fill height and fill quantity settings for the dynamic storage unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 29

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 6 / III

Description of machine subassemblies
 Part / Page

7.2 Stripper rake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 30

7.2.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 30
7.2.2 Adjust the stripper rake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 31
7.3 Spike lattice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 32
7.3.1 Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 32
7.3.2 Remove the spiked lattice. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 32
7.3.3 Install the spiked lattice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 34
7.3.4 Checking slide elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 35
7.3.5 Fastening guide rails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 36
7.3.6 Tension the spike lattice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 37
7.3.7 Drive unit for spiked lattice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 38
7.3.8 Tighten the toothed belt drive of spiked lattice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 39
7.3.9 Spiked bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 41
7.3.9.1 Remove the spike lattice. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 41
7.3.9.2 Install spike lattice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 42
7.4 Opening roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 43
7.4.1 Position of the opening roller to the spiked lattice (standard setting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 43
7.4.2 Stop production . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 44
7.4.3 V-belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 46
7.4.3.1 Tighten the V-belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 46
7.5 Material discharge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 47
7.5.1 Take-off roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 47
7.5.1.1 Positioning the ball bearing races for the take-off roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 47
7.5.1.2 Distance of the Take-off Roller to the Spike Lattice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 48
7.5.2 V-belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 49
7.5.2.1 Tighten the V-belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 49
7.6 Chute feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 50
7.6.1 Light barriers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 50
7.6.2 Setting the feed chute walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 51
7.7 R/S module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 52
7.7.1 Differential pressure switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 52
7.7.2 Compression rollers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 53
7.7.2.1 Removing the compression roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 53
7.7.2.2 Installing the compression roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 56
7.7.3 Feed rollers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 58
7.7.3.1 Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 58
7.7.3.2 Removing feed roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 59
7.7.3.3 Installing the feed roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 61
7.7.3.4 Tighten chain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 63
7.7.3.5 Adjusting the distance between the feed and opening rollers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 64
7.7.4 Opening roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 65
7.7.4.1 Removing the opening roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 65
7.7.4.2 Installing opening roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 67
7.7.4.3 Controlling and tightening toothed belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 68
7.7.4.4 Proximity switch for ascertaining the speed of the opening roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 69
7.7.5 Grating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 70
7.7.5.1 Adjusting the grating (waste volume rate) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 70
7.7.5.2 Electric cylinder for the grating setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 73
7.7.5.3 Setting the waste transport flap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 74

6 / IV UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Description of machine subassemblies
 Part / Page

8 Control technique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 77
8.1 Basic module of the control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 77
8.1.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 77
8.1.2 Carrying out a cold start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 79
8.1.3 Control system battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 80
8.1.3.1 Change battery of control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 80
8.1.3.2 Removing the battery from the control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 80
8.1.3.3 Mounting the battery in the control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 80
8.1.4 Compact Flash card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 81
8.1.4.1 Software exchange between memory card and control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 81
8.1.4.2 Switch off write protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 83
8.1.5 Ethernet interface 3IF of the control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 83
8.1.5.1 Setting the IP address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 83
8.2 Frequency converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 84
8.2.1 Identifying the frequency converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 84
8.2.2 Regenerating the replacement frequency converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 84
8.2.3 Frequency converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 85
8.2.3.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 85
8.2.3.2 Replacing the frequency converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 85
8.2.3.3 Removing the frequency converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 86
8.2.3.4 Installing the frequency converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 88
8.2.3.5 Equipping the frequency converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 89
8.2.3.6 Configuring the frequency converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 90
8.2.3.7 Adapting to the cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 91
8.2.3.8 Setting the T1000V frequency converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 92
8.3 Bus systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 94
8.3.1 Terminating resistor for CAN bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 94
8.3.1.1 Setting or wiring in the terminating resistors for the CAN-Bus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 94
8.4 External I/O card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 95
8.4.1 CAN IO module CX408 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 95
8.4.1.1 Checking CAN I/O module CX408 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 95
8.4.1.2 Set the CAN node address of the CAN I/O module CX408 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 96

9 Operating and display elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 97

9.1 Operator panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 97
9.1.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 97
9.1.2 Inserting the modules and plugs on the operator panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 97
9.1.3 Adjusting the contrast on the display unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 98
9.1.4 Key strip of the operator panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 99
9.1.4.1 Change keyboard strip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 99
9.1.4.2 Pull out the keyboard strip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 99
9.1.4.3 Insert keyboard strip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 99

10 Torque standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 101

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 6/V

Description of machine subassemblies
6 / VI UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1
Description of machine subassemblies
 Explanation on this section of the operating
instructions

1 Explanation on this section of the operating

instructions
What is Section 6 for?
Section 6 contains the detailed function and task descriptions, such as “Description of components”,
“Dismantling”, “Installation”, “Setting”, etc.
Reference is made in other sections of the operating instructions to these detailed descriptions.

What information is contained in Section 6?

For a specific subassembly, the necessary descriptions are given in the following order: Function description,
dismantling, installation, checking, setting.
The special tools required are listed at the start.
The information regarding threaded connections is listed at the end.

When does Section 6 need to be consulted?

Sections 2-5 can be consulted according to the situation. Within these sections, reference is made to the de-
tailed function and task descriptions of Section 6.

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 6/1

Description of machine subassemblies
Explanation on this section of the operating in-
structions

6/2 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Description of machine subassemblies
 Safety precautions

2 Safety precautions
2.1 Safety precautions during dismantling
When tackling dismantling jobs it is necessary to take suitable safety precautions.

Switch off main switch Q10 and secure with padlock.

All jobs requiring these security measures are indicated by an appropriate symbol on the particular page.

2.2 Safety precautions during installation

Switch off main switch Q10 and secure with padlock.
All jobs requiring these security measures are indicated by an appropriate symbol on the particular page.

2.3 Safety precautions during adjusting jobs

When tackling adjusting jobs it is necessary to take suitable safety precautions.

2.4 Work safety for checking tasks

When tackling checking jobs it is necessary to take suitable safety precautions.

2.5 Safety precautions during measuring jobs

When tackling measuring jobs it is necessary to take suitable safety precautions.

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 6/3

Description of machine subassemblies
Safety precautions

6/4 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Description of machine subassemblies
 Overview of special tools

3 Overview of special tools

Extension
Used for removing the conveyor belt rollers.

Suspension device for the B 76

Removal of spiked lattice for the B 76

Assembly tool for gas pressure spring

Used to install and remove gas pressure springs of
the feed rollers.

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 6/5

Description of machine subassemblies
Overview of special tools

Preparing the gas pressure spring prior to ap-

plication of assembly tool
Compress the gas pressure spring prior to fitting
the tool

Grease gun
Lubrication of lubricating nipple
Capacity per pump stroke 0.333 cm³

Note: The capacity without counter-pressure is 0.5

cm³

6/6 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Description of machine subassemblies
 UNImix

4 UNImix
4.1 Description
Purpose: UNImix B 76: Mixing and opening of material

9
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 10 11 12

13

Method of operation
• The partition walls divide the fed material into layers.

• The blend is produced by shifting the layers (1....8) between the material inlet (9 ) and the material outlet.

• The upright lattice (11) removes material simultaneously from all eight layers, so that a homogeneous
blend is produced.

• The material is again thoroughly blended in the area of opening roll (10).

• The distance between the opening roller (10) and the spiked lattice (11) affects the production and the
degree of opening.

• The take-off roller (12) removes the material from the spiked lattice (11).

• The tufts are collected in the suction duct (13) from where they are then extracted by the next machine
downstream.

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 6/7

Description of machine subassemblies
UNImix

Purpose: UNImix B 76 R/S: Blending and cleaning of material using a grating for cotton or an opening
mechanism for synthetic fibres.

Method of operation
• The partition walls divide the fed material into layers.

• The blend is produced by shifting the layers (1....8) between the material inlet (9 ) and the material outlet.

• The upright lattice (11) removes material simultaneously from all eight layers, so that a homogeneous
blend is produced.

• The material is again thoroughly blended in the area of opening roll (10).

• The distance between the opening roller (10) and the spiked lattice (11) affects the production and the
degree of opening.

• The take-off roller (12) removes the material from the spiked lattice (11).

• The tufts are collected in the feed chute of the module (13).

• The material is cleaned and opened in the cleaning section (14) and then fed to the next machine down-
stream.

• The tufts are collected in the suction duct (15) from where they are then extracted by the next machine
downstream.

6/8 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Description of machine subassemblies
 UNImix

4.2 Removing the windows

WARNING
Set the main switch to the “off” position and secure it with a lock.

Sequence of steps

3 4

5 5

– In an emergency, the safety screws (5) for the windows (1....4) can be loosened using a chisel.
Once loosened, the safety screws are no longer usable.

– Replace damaged safety screws with screws of the same type.

Note: Do not use any other types of screw. Otherwise, the required level of safety is no longer guaran-
teed.

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 6/9

Description of machine subassemblies
UNImix

4.3 Setting suction values

Settings, Page 3/3
WARNING
Set the main switch to the “off” position and secure it with a lock.

Sequence of steps

Pdyn Pstat
(m 3 / s) (Pa)

3a
2

– Measure the air flow rate at a straight pipe section.

Note: Ideally, each measuring point should be at a distance of 10 times the pipe diameter ahead of or
beyond a bend, funnel, transition section, etc. If this is not possible, select measuring points as indicated
in the diagram.

6 / 10 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Description of machine subassemblies
 UNImix

Air ratio
Extraction point for See relevant
upstream machine (1): operating
Air-flow rate / Static manual
vacuum
Version without R / S 0.60 - 0.90 m³/s
module: measuring point
for material delivery (2)
Air flow rate:
Version without R / S - 200 Pa
module: measuring point
for material delivery (2)
Static vacuum:
Version with R / S module: 0.50 - 0.70 m³/s
measuring point for
material delivery (3)
Air flow rate:
Version with R / S module: - 200 Pa
measuring point for
material delivery (3)
Static vacuum:
Version with R / S module: Static vacuum
measuring point for value dependent
material delivery (3a) on the
Static vacuum: measuring point
(3)

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 6 / 11

Description of machine subassemblies
UNImix

6 / 12 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Description of machine subassemblies
 Lower blend module

5 Lower blend module

5.1 Conveyor belt
5.1.1 Tools
Extension
Used for removing the conveyor belt rollers.

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 6 / 13

Description of machine subassemblies
Lower blend module

5.1.2 Removing the conveyor belt

WARNING
Set the main switch to the “off” position and secure it with a lock.

Preparatory work
– Prior to dismantling, the material that is still in the machine must be removed.

Remove parts.

1
3a

6
3 9
6
4

– Remove the rearmost bottom partition wall (1).

– Slacken the conveyor belt (9) at the rear bearing points (6).

– Remove all guide plates (3) from the machine from the side.
Note: The slide plates (3a) can be moved inside the machine. Consequently, several can be removed
from the same place.

– Remove the cover brackets (4) from both sides.

6 / 14 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Description of machine subassemblies
 Lower blend module

Removing the conveyor belt rollers

10

10
7 8
5

– Prior to removing the bearing components (5), place wooden supports (10) beneath the conveyor belt
rollers (8).

– Remove the parts of bearings (5).

Note: Store the bearing points (5) separately. The bearings on the left side of the machine are fixed
bearings and must not be mounted on the right side of the machine.

– Fit the supplied extensions (7) into the conveyor belt roller (8) and lift the conveyor belt roller out of the
machine.
Extension, Page 6/13

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 6 / 15

Description of machine subassemblies
Lower blend module

5.1.3 Installing the conveyor belt

WARNING
Set the main switch to the “off” position and secure it with a lock.

Preparing the conveyor belt

1 3 4 5

1000 m
m

– Roll out the conveyor belt (4) and position it in the correct running direction.
Note: The feed belt is marked with an arrow (2) on its inner side. If the feed belt is motion, the arrow
points towards the spiked lattice (5).

– Use the markings (1) affixed in the centre of the conveyor belt to tighten the belt.
Note: The markings (1) are located in the area of the belt splice (3).
Adjusting the distance between the conveyor belt and the spiked lattice (standard
setting), Page 6/21

Fitting the conveyor belt and slide plates and mounting the conveyor belt rollers

1 4

3a
5

6
3b
3 9
6
7 8
5

– Place the wooden supports (6) so that these are positioned beneath the conveyor belt rollers.

6 / 16 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Description of machine subassemblies
 Lower blend module

– Fit the conveyor belt (9) in the machine.

Note: Pay attention to the running direction.

– Install the cleaning unit (3b) at the delivery section.

– Firstly insert the conveyor belt roller (8) at the drive section of the conveyor belt, with the help of the ex-
tensions (7).
Extension, Page 6/13

– Mount the bearings (5) on both sides.

Note: The fixed bearing has to be mounted on the left side of the machine.

– Fit the narrower, rearmost slide plate (3a) (dark green in colour).

– Laterally insert all slide plates (3) in the machine.

Note: The slide plates can be moved inside the machine. Consequently, several can be inserted at the
same place.

– Mount the rear conveyor belt roller.

– Mount the bearings (5) on both sides.

Note: The fixed bearing has to be mounted on the left side of the machine.

Standard setting for distance between conveyor belt and spiked lattice
– Check or adjust the standard setting.
Adjusting the distance between the conveyor belt and the spiked lattice (standard
setting), Page 6/21

Mounting cover brackets and rear wall

– Fit the cover brackets (4) and set their positions, so that they are 2.00 mm from the conveyor belt (9).

– Mount the rear wall (1).

Tightening the conveyor belt

– Once all the work has been completed, tighten the conveyor belt (9) at the rear tensioning mechanism.
Tension conveyor belt, Page 6/19

– Check the running of the conveyor belt (9).

Note: Following start-up, the running of the conveyor belt must be checked frequently, and corrected
whenever necessary.
Aligning the conveyor belt, Page 6/20

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 6 / 17

Description of machine subassemblies
Lower blend module

5.1.4 Setting the cleaning unit for the conveyor belt

Material transport in the storage area, Page 3/4
WARNING
Set the main switch to the “off” position and secure it with a lock.

Sequence of steps

3 2

– Slightly loosen the screws (1) on both sides.

– On both sides, press the brush roller (3) lightly against the conveyor belt (2) and tighten the screws (1)
firmly.
Note: Some pressure is required for cleaning purposes, but if too much pressure is applied, the brush
roller will be damaged.

6 / 18 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Description of machine subassemblies
 Lower blend module

5.1.5 Tension conveyor belt

Production is not reached, Page 3/3
Material transport in the storage area, Page 3/4
Bolts (5) are used to pre-tension the conveyor belt (6). Bolts (3) are used to make the final setting for the ten-
sion.

Tensioning the conveyor belt (standard setting)

2 3 4 5 6

– Loosen the nuts(1) and turn back the screws.(3).

– Push back the conveyor belt roller (7) as far as possible.

– Loosen all nuts(2).

– Use the adjusting bolts (5) to move and position the bearing plate (4) in parallel until the conveyor belt (6)
is prestressed.

– Tighten the nuts(2).

Correctly tensioning the conveyor belt

– Use the adjusting bolts (3) to push the conveyor belt roller (7) in parallel to the rear until the correct ten-
sion is obtained.
Conveyor belt tension 0.20 - 0.60 %

Conveyor belt tension

– Observe the correctly tensioned conveyor belt and align, if necessary.

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 6 / 19

Description of machine subassemblies
Lower blend module

5.1.6 Aligning the conveyor belt

Production is not reached, Page 3/3
Material transport in the storage area, Page 3/4
Once it is determined that the conveyor belt is offset in one direction, the conveyor belt has to be properly
aligned in small steps. When doing this, however, the proper tension must not be exceeded.

The conveyor belt runs to the left.

– Apply slight tension to the tension points «A»
A A and at tension points «B» relax by the same
distance.
Note: After aligning, observe how the con-
veyor belt runs over an extended time and cor-
rect it, if necessary.

B B

The conveyor belt runs to the right.

– Apply slight tension to the tension points «A»
B B and at tension points «B» relax by the same
distance.
Note: After aligning, observe how the con-
veyor belt runs over an extended time and cor-
rect it, if necessary.

A A

The conveyor belt is running transversely

– Apply slight tension to the tension points «A»
A A and at tension points «B» relax by the same
distance.
Note: After aligning, observe how the con-
veyor belt runs over an extended time and cor-
rect it, if necessary.

B B

6 / 20 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Description of machine subassemblies
 Lower blend module

5.1.7 Adjusting the distance between the conveyor belt and the spiked
lattice (standard setting)
Settings, Page 3/3
WARNING
Set the main switch to the “off” position and secure it with a lock.

2
3
1 4

After replacement of the conveyor belt, the standard setting must be checked and/or adjusted.

Carry out a standard adjustment

– Loosen the nuts(4).

– Using the screw and the nut (1) adjust the distance (X) between the bearing plate (3) and the carrier (2).
Distance X: Standard setting for distance between conveyor belt and spiked lattice (on both
sides)
Distance X (both sides) 30.0 mm

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 6 / 21

Description of machine subassemblies
Lower blend module

5.1.8 Conveyor belt drive

5.1.8.1 Tightening the chain

Material transport in the storage area, Page 3/4

3
2

Z35 Z19

Sequence of steps
– Loosen all nuts (1).

– Use the screw (2) to tighten the chain (3).

Note: Do not tighten the chain (3) to such a degree that it cannot be pressed inwards.

6 / 22 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Description of machine subassemblies
 Upper blend module

6 Upper blend module

6.1 Material entry
6.1.1 Description
Purpose: Storage pressure monitoring

2
5
+ +

+ Connection point for plastic hose (3) 4 Dust filter at connection point (-)
1 Storage 5 Electrical connections
2 Pressure sensor in electrical panel
3 Plastic hose running to the pressure-
reduction device housing

The pressure sensor (2) monitors the excess pressure in storage bin (1). The supply of material to the UNI-
mix is controlled by taking into account the parameter set for excess pressure.

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 6 / 23

Description of machine subassemblies
Upper blend module

6.1.2 Setting the distributor flap

Storage not adequately filled, Page 3/5
In order to distribute the material in the storage unit, the program-controlled flaps swivel back and forth. The
pause duration for the flap on either side of the machine can be set via a data screen.
Setting aim: Uniform distribution of the material in the storage unit.

Setting the swivel motion of the flaps

- +

1 3
4
5

– Prerequisite: Select the data screen. .

40.4, Page 2/67
Set the pause duration for the flap on either side of the machine via the data screen. (The relative posi-
tions of the flaps are determined as a percentage.)
Note: The storage unit must be evenly filled. Observe the filling process over a long period.

Setting the regulating valve

– Set the pressure at the regulating valve (1) to 3.0 bars.

Setting the end-position damping (standard setting)

– Insert the screw (2) completely and then loosen it by 3 turns.
Note: The damping is correctly set, if the flaps move easily but gently towards the end positions. If ne-
cessary, adjust accordingly.

Restriction settings (standard settings)

– Loosen nuts (4).

– Insert the screw (3) completely and then loosen it by 8 turns.

Note: The restriction settings are correct, if each flap completes its back-and-forth motion within a period
of 3 seconds. If necessary, adjust accordingly.

6 / 24 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Description of machine subassemblies
 Upper blend module

6.1.3 Adjust the pressure sensor

Production is not reached, Page 3/3
Storage not adequately filled, Page 3/5
Description Material entry, Page 6/23
By means of the correct adjustment of the pressure sensor (2) filling of the storage (1) is influenced.
Setting aim: The storage unit (1) should be filled as much as possible. However, blockages around the ma-
terial inlet are to be avoided.

Determining the fill height

3
2

– Check the fill height in the storage unit (1) and the distribution in the chambers (3).

Adjust the pressure sensor

– Based on the filling in the storage (1) increase or reduce the value in the corresponding data screen.
Note: If the filling in the storage is too deep, a higher value must be set in the data screen.
40.3, Page 2/67

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 6 / 25

Description of machine subassemblies
Upper blend module

6.2 Separating vanes

6.2.1 Description
Purpose: To influence the filling of the chambers.

Method of operation
• The separating vanes (1) can be adjusted in height and in three different positions. Before the separat-
ing vanes are adjusted, the filling can be influenced by altering the fan speed. The filling of the individual
chambers (2) can be subsequently assessed. The separating vanes (1) are to be adjusted according to
the filling process. The most favourable settings are to be determined by trial and error.

6 / 26 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Description of machine subassemblies
 Upper blend module

6.2.2 Adjust the separating vanes

Production is not reached, Page 3/3
Blockages in the machine, Page 3/4
Storage not adequately filled, Page 3/5
WARNING
Set the main switch to the “off” position and secure it with a lock.

Description Separating vanes, Page 6/26

The separating vanes can be adjusted in height and in three different positions. The best settings must be de-
termined by trial and error.
Setting aim: The separating vanes must be adjusted so that all chambers are filled as uniformly as possible.

Set the height of the separating vanes. (Standard setting all materials)
– Set the height so that the next chamber is op-
timally filled. Reducing the distance leads to
100

an increase in air speed and vice versa.

190

Adjust the tilt to the rear.

– Adjust the tilt to the rear if the chambers over-
fill or if the material remains on the separating
vanes.

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 6 / 27

Description of machine subassemblies
Upper blend module

Adjust the tilt forward

– Adjust the tilt forward if a better separation of
the material is required at that point.

6.3 Exhaust air

6.3.1 Exhaust air
Production is not reached, Page 3/3
Blockages in the machine, Page 3/4
Storage not adequately filled, Page 3/5
Open transfer, Page 3/5

1 2 1
+ Pa

4
3 5

The pressure can be set using the cone tube (3) for the secondary air and the sliders (1). With the transfer (4)
open dust-laden air must not be allowed to blow out. At all events, the cone (3) must be positioned closer.
Setting aim: There should be a slight overpressure in the exhaust air duct («X»)
Exhaust air
Overpressure +20 - +40 Pa

6 / 28 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Description of machine subassemblies
 Delivery section

7 Delivery section
7.1 Making fill height and fill quantity settings for the dynamic
storage unit
Dynamic storage unit at spiked lattice, Page 3/5
The fill quantity in the dynamic storage unit has to be greater for large production than for small production.
The positions of the light barriers (2) and (3) affect the fill properties of the dynamic storage unit.The greater
the distance of the light barrier from the spiked lattice, the larger the fill quantity in the dynamic storage unit.
The conveyor belt transports no more material towards the spiked lattice, once the light beam (1) has been
broken.

Sequence of steps
– Set the required fill height by appropriately ad-
justing the horizontal and / or vertical positions
of light barriers (2) and (3).

– Set the emitter (2) in such a way that the light

beam (1) is directed towards the centre of the
receiver(3).

3
2 1

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 6 / 29

Description of machine subassemblies
Delivery section

7.2 Stripper rake

7.2.1 Description
Purpose: Material Retention

10°

1
3

The rake (2) holds the material back to prevent large chunks of material being carried along by the spiked lat-
tice
.
Method of operation
• As soon as there is an insufficient quantity of material (1) on the conveyor belt, the rake (2) is lowered.
This causes the limit switch (3) to be pressed. The speed of the conveyor belt is increased via the control
unit.

6 / 30 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Description of machine subassemblies
 Delivery section

7.2.2 Adjust the stripper rake

Blockages in the machine, Page 3/4
Description Stripper rake, Page 6/30

6
10°
5

4 3

Sequence of steps
– Urge the rakes (2) completely upward.

– Loosen the gudgeon (6).

– Adjust the setting collar (5) so that the terminal switch roller (4) lies in the recess.

– Tighten the gudgeon (6). The limit switch (3) must not respond until the rake has moved down about 10°.

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 6 / 31

Description of machine subassemblies
Delivery section

7.3 Spike lattice

7.3.1 Tools
Suspension device for the B 76
Removal of spiked lattice for the B 76

7.3.2 Remove the spiked lattice.

WARNING
Set the main switch to the “off” position and secure it with a lock.

Preparations

1 2 3 4

– The blender has to be completely empty.

– Remove the electrical connector from the module.

– Use the castor jacks to move the module (2) away from the blender.

– Unscrew the cover plates (1) which are now exposed.

6 / 32 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Description of machine subassemblies
 Delivery section

– Remove the two supporting rollers (3).

– Unscrew the doffing unit (4).

Install the dismantling tool

– Remove the slide elements (13) on both sides.

9 5 – Remove the crossbar (6), place it on the rear

crossbar and bolt tightly.

– Place the support (5) on the cross-member (6)

and tighten firmly.
Suspension device for the B
6 76, Page 6/32
7
– Pull the strap provided (9) through the guide
8
in the support (5) and fasten it to the cross-
member (6).

– Hang the pulley tackle (7) on the strap (9).

– Use the lifting device (8) to grip the spiked lat-

13 tice together with the roller and tension slightly
with the pulley tackle (7).

Remove bearings

10

11

12

– Slacken the toothed belt (9):

– Remove the bearings (10) and (11) on both sides.

Note: Store the parts of the bearing points (10 / 11) separately. The bearing points (10) on the right side
of the machine are fixed bearings and must not be confused with the bearing points (11) on the left side
of the machine.

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 6 / 33

Description of machine subassemblies
Delivery section

Lower the spiked lattice

– Lower the spiked lattice (13) using the pulley
tackle (7) until it lies on the floor.

13

7.3.3 Install the spiked lattice

WARNING
Set the main switch to the “off” position and secure it with a lock.

Spiked lattice
– Installation is done in the reverse order of dismantling.
Note: When mounting the bearing points, mount the fixed bearings on the right side of the machine.

6 / 34 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Description of machine subassemblies
 Delivery section

7.3.4 Checking slide elements

Visually checking the slide elements
WARNING
Set the main switch to the “off” position and secure it with a lock.

– Remove the covers (1) on both sides.

– On both sides, visually check all of the sliding pieces (2).

Note: Use a torch!

Action
The slide elements show traces of wear.
– Replace the slide elements before these become worn down to the fastening screws.
Note: The contact surfaces of the spiked lattice will be damaged if the slide elements are worn.
Install the spiked lattice, Page 6/34

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 6 / 35

Description of machine subassemblies
Delivery section

7.3.5 Fastening guide rails

Delivery section, Page 3/6
WARNING
Set the main switch to the “off” position and secure it with a lock.

Sequence of steps

– Ensure that the guide rails (1) are correctly positioned when installing them.

6 / 36 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Description of machine subassemblies
 Delivery section

7.3.6 Tension the spike lattice

Settings, Page 3/3
WARNING
Set the main switch to the “off” position and secure it with a lock.

Only apply tension at the bottom roller.

Setting aim: Correct Tension
Distance between centres
Distance between centres 2483.0 mm
“A”: Upright lattice tension:
0.0 %
Distance between centres 2495.0 mm
“A”: Upright lattice tension:
0.5 %
Distance between centres 2502.0 mm
“A”: Upright lattice tension:
0.8 %
A

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 6 / 37

Description of machine subassemblies
Delivery section

7.3.7 Drive unit for spiked lattice

Delivery section, Page 3/6
WARNING
Set the main switch to the “off” position and secure it with a lock.

In order to ensure lubrication of the gear wheels, install the motor and the gearbox in the position specified.

Sequence of steps

– Install the gear motor (1) so that the housing with the reserve oil supply is positioned at the bottom. (See
diagram.)

6 / 38 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Description of machine subassemblies
 Delivery section

7.3.8 Tighten the toothed belt drive of spiked lattice

Settings, Page 3/3
WARNING
Set the main switch to the “off” position and secure it with a lock.

Setting aim: Appropriate preliminary tensioning and maintenance of the belts are required to ensure an op-
timal service life and optimal power transfer. If the belts are too tight, bearings and belts may sustain dam-
age. If the belts are too slack, the teeth of the belt may skip which could lead to faults and damage. In addi-
tion, care must be taken to ensure the cleanliness of belts and belt pulleys as well as to remove any dirt that
has accumulated at the tooth base.
Deflection example of a toothed belt with a 640 mm distance between centres (L)
Distance between centres (L) Deflection (d) =
640 mm approx. 1.5% of
640 = approx. 10
mm
Force (F) Push in the belt
carefully until
some resistance
can be felt.

Sequence of steps
– The length (L) of the toothed belt is determined by the axial spacing of the tooth wheels. In the center of
this distance, the belt must be able to be deflected by approx. 1.5% of the length (L) with the force (F).

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 6 / 39

Description of machine subassemblies
Delivery section

Sequence of steps

– Loosen screws (1).

– Using the screws (3) tighten the toothed belt (2) in accordance with the specification.

6 / 40 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Description of machine subassemblies
 Delivery section

7.3.9 Spiked bar

7.3.9.1 Remove the spike lattice.

WARNING
Set the main switch to the “off” position and secure it with a lock.

Sequence of steps

3
1
2
1
8

7 6

– The machine must be completely empty.

– Use the castor jacks to move the module (8) away from the blender.

– Unscrew the cover plates (6) which are now exposed.

– Completely slacken the spiked lattice.

– Move the defective spiked lattice (2) into the vicinity of opening (7) and remove the safety plate.

– Remove the safety spikes (3) above and underneath the spiked bar (2) to be dismantled. If necessary,
cut the sealing strips (1).

– Remove the spiked bar (2).

– Use pliers to remove the remaining sealing strips (1).

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 6 / 41

Description of machine subassemblies
Delivery section

7.3.9.2 Install spike lattice

WARNING
Set the main switch to the “off” position and secure it with a lock.

Sequence of steps

3
1
2
1
8

7 6
4 5

– Mount the new spiked bar (2), the two sealing strips (1) and the threaded parts (4) and (5).
Note: With a drop of «Loctite 932» on the threads (low to moderate screw retention) secure the screws
(4).

– Push the retaining pins (3) laterally and as far as possible into the sealing strips (1).

– It is imperative to tighten the special nut (5) at the correct torque.

Thread dimension M5
torque 5 Nm

– Refit the removed parts (6) and (7).

– Move the module (8) back to the blender and screw it in place.
Tension the spike lattice, Page 6/37

6 / 42 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Description of machine subassemblies
 Delivery section

7.4 Opening roller

7.4.1 Position of the opening roller to the spiked lattice (standard
setting)
Settings, Page 3/3
This is factory-set. The setting has to be checked only after replacement of the electric cylinder .

Preparatory work
– Introduce the electric cylinder entirely in the test program (data screen 82.5)

WARNING
Set the main switch to the “off” position and secure it with a lock.

Sequence of steps

A
1

– The electric cylinder (1) is retracted.

82.5, Page 2/73

– Using the universal rod (2) set the minimum spacing «A».
Distance “A”: Minimum 5.0 mm
distance between the tips
of the upright lattices and
the opening roll.

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 6 / 43

Description of machine subassemblies
Delivery section

7.4.2 Stop production

Production is not reached, Page 3/3
Blockages in the machine, Page 3/4
If the speed of the spiked lattice is not sufficient to achieve a specific production, the degree of opening for the
material has to be changed.
The opening roller setting primarily affects the degree of opening. For constant spiked-lattice speeds, the
production rate is also affected. If the opening roller is positioned closer to the spiked lattice, the tufts will be
smaller. In some circumstances, the spiked-lattice speed has to be increased so that the required production
rate can be achieved. 0.0 => lowest degree of opening for the material. 1.0 => highest degree of opening.
Setting aim: By adjusting the parameter values appropriately, the ideal setting for the production can
achieved. No parameter should be set to its maximum value, however.

Setting the speed of the spiked lattice ( production level: UNImix and R/S module)
– Prerequisite: If the desired production is not
attained by means of the speed of the spiked
lattice, the rate of opening of the material will
have to be reduced.
Production can be adjusted in steps by gradu-
ally altering the speed of the spiked lattice.
Upright lattice speed ranges
Minimum speed for spiked Level 20
lattice
Maximum speed for Level 100
spiked lattice

R/S module: Changing the speed of the

spiked lattice will also cause the speed of
the feed rollers in the module to change.
The production rate of the module
increases.

Direction of rotation of the opening roller

– As s standard setting, the opening roller (1)
“goes against the flow” (A), i.e. runs in the dir-
1 ection opposite to that in which he spiked lat-
A B tice (2) runs.

– If production is insufficient, despite the

production level and opening roller being set
correctly, then attempts can be made with the
opening roller “going with the flow” (B).
Note: The opening roller (1) will then run in the
same direction (B) as the spiked lattice (2).
For this setting, the material will no longer
be opened immediately.
2

6 / 44 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Description of machine subassemblies
 Delivery section

Changing the degree of opening

– By gradually changing the degree of opening, the production rate can be altered in steps, while maintain-
ing the speed of the spiked lattice.
Degree of opening
Lowest degree of opening: Level 0.1:
Maximum
distance
between the
opening roller
and the spiked
lattice.
Highest degree of opening Level 1.0:
Minimum
distance
between the
opening roller
and the spiked
lattice.

Adjusting the production of the module to the production of the blender

– Prerequisite: Along with the settings of data
screen 10.1, the production rate of the module
can be increased or reduced.
Select the data screen and change the factor
value on the fifth line.
Note: The feed chute must always be filled as
much as possible.
Changing the production of the module
Value below level 1.0 Reduced production
of the module
Value above level 1.0 Increased production
of the module
Level 1.0 Standard setting

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 6 / 45

Description of machine subassemblies
Delivery section

7.4.3 V-belt

7.4.3.1 Tighten the V-belt

Settings, Page 3/3
WARNING
Set the main switch to the “off” position and secure it with a lock.

The V-belts of the opening rollers must be tightened so that they can be pushed in at normal pressure.

Sequence of steps

– Loosen the four bolts (1).

– Use bolt (3) to move the plate (2), which will tighten the belt.
The belt can be pushed in Approx. 5 mm

6 / 46 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Description of machine subassemblies
 Delivery section

7.5 Material discharge

7.5.1 Take-off roller

7.5.1.1 Positioning the ball bearing races for the take-off roller
WARNING
Set the main switch to the “off” position and secure it with a lock.

Sequence of steps

2 2
3 3
4 1 4

– At the installed take-off roller, precisely align the screw holes of the ball bearing races (4) with the
grooves (2) of the bearing journals (3).

– Coat the screws (1) with Loctite 243.

Note: Loctite 243 is a non-setting product for securing screws.

– Insert the screws (1) fully and then loosen them by half a turn.
Note: The screws (1) are not used for fastening purposes, but to ensure the movement of the bearing
races (4).

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 6 / 47

Description of machine subassemblies
Delivery section

7.5.1.2 Distance of the Take-off Roller to the Spike Lattice

Settings, Page 3/3
WARNING
Set the main switch to the “off” position and secure it with a lock.

Setting aim: Removing cotton from the spiked lattice

Sequence of steps

1
2

3
10084436

5 4
10 20 30 40

– Loosen screws (1).

– Use the nuts (3) to set take-off roller (4) to the corresponding position on the scale (5).
Note: The distance from the take-off roller (4) to the spiked lattice must be identical on the left and the
right side of the machine.
Clearance “X” 10 - 40.0 mm

– After adjustment of the take-off roller (4) adjust the tension of the V-belt (2).
Tighten the V-belt, Page 6/49

6 / 48 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Description of machine subassemblies
 Delivery section

7.5.2 V-belt

7.5.2.1 Tighten the V-belt

WARNING
Set the main switch to the “off” position and secure it with a lock.

The V-belts of the take-off rollers must be tightened, so that they can be pushed in at normal pressure.

Sequence of steps

1 1
X

10084436

2 10 20 30

– Loosen screws (1).

– Use the screw (3) to tighten the belt (2).

The belt can be pushed in Approx. 5 mm

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 6 / 49

Description of machine subassemblies
Delivery section

7.6 Chute feed

7.6.1 Light barriers
Feed chute, Page 3/6
The material height in the feed chute is dependent on the position of the top light barrier (1). The bottom light
barrier (5) prevents the feed chute from becoming empty.

Top light barrier

– Position the light barrier (1) in such a way that
the feed chute (3) can never overflow, but on
the other hand a maximum material height is
attained.
2
Note: Precisely align the receiver (2) with the
centre of the light barrier (1).
3 If the top light barrier (1) at the feed chute
1 becomes unobstructed, the material
4 supply device (spiked lattice) is
deactivated.
– Set the amount of time until material is reques-
5 ted again.
40.5, Page 2/68

Middle light barrier

– Position the light barrier (4) around the centre of the feed chute (basic setting).
Note: The speed of the spiked lattice is higher when the light barrier (4) is free of obstruction.

– If the filling of the feed chute is continually inefficient, place the light barrier (4) in a higher position.

Bottom light barrier

– Prerequisite: The light barrier (5) detects when the minimum fill level is reached.
Set the amount of time between the detection of the reaching of the minimum fill level and the moment
when a fault message is issued.
40.5, Page 2/68

6 / 50 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Description of machine subassemblies
 Delivery section

7.6.2 Setting the feed chute walls

Feed chute, Page 3/6
WARNING
Set the main switch to the “off” position and secure it with a lock.

If the material feed for the module is too compact, the feed chute wall has to be “closed” more.
The position of the feed chute wall (1) affects the volume of material feed in the feed chute.

Sequence of steps

1
1

– Prerequisite: Feed material is too light or too heavy.

Loosen all screws (2) on both sides.

– Re-position the feed chute wall (1) according to the material feed required, ensuring that it always
remains parallel with its original position while being moved.

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 6 / 51

Description of machine subassemblies
Delivery section

7.7 R/S module

7.7.1 Differential pressure switch
R/S module, Page 3/7
DANGER
If the vacuum is below the specified minimum value, the suction points will not be cleared of
waste correctly.
The minimum vacuum setting, for which the machine is switched off, must not be lower than this
value.
Blocked suction points affect the extraction of waste and can lead to machine damage.

The differential pressure switches (6) and (7) monitor the vacuum during waste extraction or material delivery.
Setting aim: The minimum vacuum setting will be monitored. The machine switches off, if the measured va-
cuum drops below the value set at the dial.

Sequence of steps

3 5
6
2
1 7

-
+

+ No connection made here 5 Threaded connection point

- Connection point for suction unit 6 Differential pressure switch for monitor-
1 NO Opens if the vacuum drops ing the vacuum for waste extraction

2 NC No connection made here 7 Differential pressure switch for monitor-

ing the vacuum at the material delivery
3 Dial section of the machine
4 Com Input voltage

6 / 52 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Description of machine subassemblies
 Delivery section

– Use the dial (3) to set the required value.

Monitoring of minimum vacuum settings
Waste extraction: min. - 600 Pa
Minimum static vacuum
Material delivery: min. - 150 Pa
Minimum static vacuum

7.7.2 Compression rollers

7.7.2.1 Removing the compression roller

WARNING
Set the main switch to the “off” position and secure it with a lock.

Preparatory work

1
2
4 3

– Loosen the screws (1) of the cross-members on the right-hand side of the machine.

– Remove all parts (2).

Note: Cover the opening roller (3) to avoid injury.

– Remove the chains (4) on both sides.

Marking the numbers of the bearing journals for the compression rollers
Note: It is essential that the marked bearing journals are refitted at the points where they were removed.

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 6 / 53

Description of machine subassemblies
Delivery section

– The bearing journals (1 / 2) or (3 / 4) are not

the same and are marked with different num-
bers (xxx).
xxx
– Mark the number of a bearing journal (xxx) at
3/4 the point where it is removed or else note it
1/2 separately.
Note: There must be no possibility of confu-
sion regarding the removal position and the
number.

Removing the front compression roller (system with bearing journals)

8 9 9 8
12 7
7
5
5 11
1
10 10

4 4
6
6

3 2

– Remove the gas pressure springs (1).

Removing feed roller, Page 6/59

– The bearing journals (2) of the feed roller must fit through the holes on the side sections of the machine
(3) and be horizontally positioned.

– Secure the compression roller (11) with ropes or belts (12).

– Remove the sprockets (4) and the Seeger circlip rings (5).

– Pull off the bearing levers (6).

– Remove all nuts (7) from the bearing plates (8).

– Remove the bearing plates (8).

6 / 54 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Description of machine subassemblies
 Delivery section

– Prerequisite: Prior to removing the bearing journals (10) make a note of the number and position where
the journal was removed, in each case.
Remove the screws (9) and the bearing journals (10).

– Remove the compression roller (11) by moving it forwards and out of the machine.

Removing the front compression roller (system with shaft)

8 9 9 8
12 7
7
5
5 11
1
10 10

4 4
6
6

3 2

– Remove the gas pressure springs (1).

Removing feed roller, Page 6/59

– The bearing journals (2) of the feed roller must fit through the holes on the side sections of the machine
(3) and be horizontally positioned.

– Secure the compression roller (11) with ropes or belts (12).

– Remove the sprockets (4) and the Seeger circlip rings (5).

– Pull off the bearing levers (6).

– Remove all nuts (7) from the bearing plates (8).

– Remove the bearing plates (8).

– Loosen the screws (9).

Note: Do not completely loosen the screws.

– Pull out the shaft (10).

– Remove the compression roller (11) by moving it forwards and out of the machine.

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 6 / 55

Description of machine subassemblies
Delivery section

Removing the rear compression roller

– Secure the compression roller (14) with ropes
or belts (12).
13 12
– The front compression roller (11) must first be
14 11 removed before the rear compression roller
(14) can be removed.

– In addition, the material deflectors (13) on the

inner side of the machine must be moved up-
wards and out of the machine.
– The usual procedure is exactly the same as
that applied when removing the front compres-
sion roller (11).

– The compression roller (14) must likewise be

moved forwards and out of the machine.

7.7.2.2 Installing the compression roller

WARNING
Set the main switch to the “off” position and secure it with a lock.

Installing the front compression roller (system with bearing journals)

9 9
12
11
1
10 10

6
6

– Move the compression roller (11) to the position for installation and secure with ropes or belts (12).

CAUTION
Machine damage can occur if marked bearing journals are not fitted at the correct positions.

– Centre the bearing journals (10) in the bore holes and tighten firmly using the screws (9).
Note: Check the bearing journals (10) for correct positioning before tightening the screws (9) firmly.

6 / 56 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Description of machine subassemblies
 Delivery section

– Prerequisite: Coat the bore hole surfaces for the bearing levers with assembly paste.
Mount the bearing levers (6) and all other parts.

– Use the assembly tool to install the gas pressure springs (1).

– Install the opening roller.

Installing opening roller, Page 6/67

– Add the chain and tighten it according to specifications.

Tighten chain, Page 6/63

Removing the front compression roller (system with shaft)

9 9
12
11
1
10 10

6
6

– Move the compression roller (11) to the position for installation and secure with ropes or belts (12).

– Centre the shaft (10) in the bore hole and tighten firmly using the screws (9).
Note: Check the bearing journals (10) for correct positioning before tightening the screws (9) firmly.

– Prerequisite: Prior to installation, lightly coat the shaft with assembly paste.
Insert the shaft (10).

– Fit the remaining parts.

– Tighten the screws (9) firmly.

– Prerequisite: Coat the bore hole surfaces for the bearing levers with assembly paste.
Mount the bearing levers (6) and all other parts.

– Use the assembly tool to install the gas pressure springs (1).

– Install the opening roller.

Installing opening roller, Page 6/67

– Add the chain and tighten it according to specifications.

Tighten chain, Page 6/63

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 6 / 57

Description of machine subassemblies
Delivery section

7.7.3 Feed rollers

7.7.3.1 Tools
Assembly tool for gas pressure spring
Used to install and remove gas pressure springs of
the feed rollers.

Preparing the gas pressure spring prior to ap-

plication of assembly tool
Compress the gas pressure spring prior to fitting
the tool

6 / 58 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Description of machine subassemblies
 Delivery section

7.7.3.2 Removing feed roller

WARNING
Set the main switch to the “off” position and secure it with a lock.

Preparatory work
– Remove the opening roller.
Removing the opening roller, Page 6/65

Removing gas pressure springs

– Use the adjusting screws (1) to press together
the gas pressure springs (2) on both sides until
the clamp (3) can be applied.
Assembly tool for gas pressure
spring, Page 6/58

1 – Release the pressure on the adjusting screws

(1).
2
– Subsequently remove the bolts and the gas
pressure springs (2).

Removing the feed roller

Note: Carry out all steps on both sides.

1
3
2 2
2

4
5

6 7 7 6

– The gas pressure springs (3) have been removed.

– Secure the feed roller (4) with ropes or belts (1).

– Remove as many parts as necessary until the bearing levers (2) can be removed.

– Loosen all screws (6).

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 6 / 59

Description of machine subassemblies
Delivery section

1
3
2 2
2

4
5

6 7 7 6

– Prerequisite: Use the ropes or belts (1) to lift the feed roller to the centre of the opening in the side sec-
tion of the machine.
Pull off the bearing journals (7).

– Lower the feed roller (4) on to the support (5).

6 / 60 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Description of machine subassemblies
 Delivery section

7.7.3.3 Installing the feed roller

WARNING
Set the main switch to the “off” position and secure it with a lock.

Preparing the gas pressure spring for the installation

– Place the non-compressed gas pressure
spring (1) in the device (4).
5
Preparing the gas pressure spring prior to
application of assembly tool, Page 6/58

– The bolts (3) and nuts are used to secure the

3 spring.
1
4 – Insert the bolt (2) so that the gas pressure
2 spring (1) becomes compressed.

3 – As soon as the gas pressure spring (1) has

been fully compressed, insert the tool (5).
Note: The gas pressure spring must be posi-
tioned against the stops.

– Carefully loosen the clamping bolt (2).

Note: Ensure that the tool is correctly posi-
tioned.
– Remove the bolts (3).

Procedure for installing feed rollers

1
3
8
2 2
8 2

4
5

6 7 7 6

– Move the feed roller (4) to the position for installation and secure it with ropes (1).

– Prerequisite: Prior to installation, coat the bearing journals (7) with assembly paste.
Insert the bearing journals (7) into the feed roller (4).
Note: The bearing journals must be inserted into the feed roller (8) up to the limit stop.

– Mount the bearing levers (2) and all other parts.

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 6 / 61

Description of machine subassemblies
Delivery section

1
3
8
2 2
8 2

4
5

6 7 7 6

– Use the assembly tool to install the gas pressure springs (3).

– Adjust the feed roller (4) laterally, so that it is evenly aligned, and subsequently tighten the screws (6)
firmly.
Note: Tighten all four screws (6) on the circumference firmly.

– Install the opening roller.

Installing opening roller, Page 6/67

– Add the chain and tighten it according to specifications.

Tighten chain, Page 6/63

6 / 62 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Description of machine subassemblies
 Delivery section

7.7.3.4 Tighten chain

R/S module, Page 3/7
WARNING
Set the main switch to the “off” position and secure it with a lock.

2
X

Sequence of steps
– When checking the chain (1), it must deflect by the specified amount («X»).
Note: If the deflection distance is incorrect, use a chain tensioner (2) to adjust the chain tension.
Tightening chain
Dimension X 5.0 - 10.0 mm

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 6 / 63

Description of machine subassemblies
Delivery section

7.7.3.5 Adjusting the distance between the feed and opening rollers
R/S module, Page 3/7
WARNING
Set the main switch to the “off” position and secure it with a lock.

To optimise the running properties, the feed roller (3) can be adapted to an assortment.

Sequence of steps

10
2

5
3 0

5
X

– Loosen the nuts (3) on both sides.

– Prerequisite: Select the distance (X) between the feed roller and opening roller.
Use the nuts (2) to set the feed roller (4) to the required value on the scale (1).
Note: The settings made on both sides must be equal, in order that the feed roller (4) is as parallel as
possible to the opening roller (5).
Distance between feed roller and opening roller
Distance X: 3.0 mm Minimum distance. X
must not fall below
minimum distance
value.
Distance “X”: 4.0 mm Standard setting for all
materials

– The optimal setting is determined by trial and error.

6 / 64 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Description of machine subassemblies
 Delivery section

7.7.4 Opening roller

7.7.4.1 Removing the opening roller

WARNING
Set the main switch to the “off” position and secure it with a lock.

Preparations

5 4 3 2

– Loosen the bolts (1) of the cross-members on the right-hand side of the machine.

– Remove all parts (2) until the opening roller (3) is accessible.

– Slacken and remove the belt (4).

– Remove the belt pulley (5).

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 6 / 65

Description of machine subassemblies
Delivery section

Preparing auxiliary equipment for removal

13
12

11

10

– Prepare auxiliary equipment for removal, featuring pallets (11) and boards (12), on a trolley jack (10).
Note: Move the structure towards the underside of the opening roller (13).

– Carefully lift the auxiliary equipment using the trolley jack until the boards (12) lightly abut the opening
roller (13).
Note: Avoid applying pressure to the opening roller (13).

Removing opening roller

15 15
16
17

18
19
13
18
20 20

21 21

– Remove all nuts (15).

– Remove the bolt (16).

– Remove the block (17).

– Screwing the screws in the threaded holes (19) forces off the bearing plates (18).

6 / 66 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Description of machine subassemblies
 Delivery section

– Remove all screws (20).

– Remove the two bearing journals (21) from the opening roller.

7.7.4.2 Installing opening roller

WARNING
Set the main switch to the “off” position and secure it with a lock.

Sequence of steps

15 15

18

13
18
20 20

21 21

– Use the auxiliary equipment for removal to move the opening roller (13) to the installation position.

– Roll the opening roller (13) into the machine.

Note: Align the opening roller (13) in such a way that the bearing journals (21) can be inserted into the
bore holes of the opening roller.

– Prerequisite: Prior to installation, coat the bearing journals (21) with an assembly paste.
Insert the bearing journals (21) into the bore holes of the opening roller.

– Insert the screws (20) and tighten firmly.

– Install the bearing plates (18).

– Tighten the nuts(15) firmly.

– Lower the auxiliary equipment and rotate the opening roller (13).

– Install all remaining parts together with the drive pulley, and then fit the toothed belt and tighten it accord-
ing to specifications.
Controlling and tightening toothed belts, Page 6/68

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 6 / 67

Description of machine subassemblies
Delivery section

7.7.4.3 Controlling and tightening toothed belts

R/S module, Page 3/7
WARNING
Set the main switch to the “off” position and secure it with a lock.

Setting aim: Appropriate preliminary tensioning and

maintenance of the belts are required to ensure an
L
optimal service life and power transfer. If the belts
are too tight, bearings and belts may sustain dam-
age. If the belts are too slack, the teeth in the belt
d may skip leading to faults and damage. In addi-
tion, care must be taken to ensure the cleanliness
F of belts and belt pulleys as well as to remove any
dirt accumulation at the tooth base.
Example of deflection for a toothed belt with a
640 mm distance between axes (L)
Deflection (d) as a 1.50 %
percentage of the distance
between axes (L)
Deflection (d) at approx. Approx. 10 mm
1.5% of the distance
between axes (L=640 mm)
Force (F) Push in the belt
carefully until
some resistance
can be felt.

Sequence of steps
– The toothed belt (1) must deflect by the spe-
cified amount (X).
Note: If the deflection distance is not correct,
then the toothed belt must be tightened by
moving the motor.
Toothed-belt load (F) and deflection (s)
X
Load (F) on the toothed 100 N = 10.0 kg
belt
1 Deflection (s) of toothed 7.00 mm
belt
Measurement with Frequency = 96
instrument for measuring Hz
2 the belt tension

6 / 68 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Description of machine subassemblies
 Delivery section

7.7.4.4 Proximity switch for ascertaining the speed of the opening roller
R/S module, Page 3/7
Correct transmission of pulses for determining the speed of the opening roller.

Sequence of steps

LED X

1 2

– Use the two nuts (2) to set the proximity switch (1).
Note: When the proximity switch is active, the LEDs are lit up.
Proximity switch
Dimension X 1.0 - 2.0 mm

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 6 / 69

Description of machine subassemblies
Delivery section

7.7.5 Grating

7.7.5.1 Adjusting the grating (waste volume rate)

R/S module, Page 3/7
The positioning of the electric cylinder lifting rod (1) determines the positions of the dust bars (2). This in turn
determines the effectiveness of the dust bars regarding the removal of impurities from the waste as well as its
composition. The speed of the opening roller (3) also has an effect on the cleaning intensity as well as on the
fibre load.
Setting aim: Optimum degree of cleaning with the least possible waste volume.

Altering the waste volume rate (without the VarioSet)

2 2

1 1

X X1

– Use the data screen to adjust the setting for the electric cylinder lifting rod (1) to the required value.
Note: The more the lifting rod (1) has retracted, the greater the influence of the dust bars (2) on the
waste volume rate.
Setting for dust bars (without the VarioSet)
The data-screen setting Maximum waste
value of “5” corresponds volume rate
to the dimension X
The data-screen setting Minimum waste
value of “100” volume rate
corresponds to the
dimension X1
10.1, Page 2/59

– Use the data screen to adjust the speed setting for the opening roller (3) to the required value.
Note: A higher speed can also result in a greater fibre load.

6 / 70 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Description of machine subassemblies
 Delivery section

Speed of the opening roller (without the VarioSet)

The data-screen setting Low cleaning
value of "500" intensity, small
corresponds to "low fibre load
speed"
The data-screen setting High cleaning
value of "1500" intensity, large
corresponds to "high fibre load
speed"

10.1, Page 2/59

– It is recommended to analyse the waste composition after each setting alteration.

Note: The optimal setting for a given material must be determined by trial and error.

Altering the waste volume rate (with the VarioSet)

2 2

1 1

1 10

– Use the data screen to adjust the setting for the electric cylinder lifting rod (1) to the required value.
Note: The more the lifting rod (1) has retracted, the greater the influence of the dust bars (2) on the
waste volume rate.
Setting for dust bars (with the VarioSet)
Data-screen setting value Maximum waste
of “1” volume rate
Data-screen setting value Minimum waste
of “10” volume rate
10.1, Page 2/58

– Use the data screen to adjust the speed setting for the opening roller (3) to the required value.
Note: A higher speed can also result in a greater fibre load.

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 6 / 71

Description of machine subassemblies
Delivery section

2 2

1 1

1 10

Speed of the opening roller (with the VarioSet)

The data-screen setting Low cleaning
value of "0.1" corresponds intensity, small
to "low speed" fibre load
The data-screen setting High cleaning
value of "1.0" corresponds intensity, large
to "high speed" fibre load

10.1, Page 2/58

– It is recommended to analyse the waste composition after each setting alteration.

Note: The optimal setting for a given material must be determined by trial and error.

6 / 72 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Description of machine subassemblies
 Delivery section

7.7.5.2 Electric cylinder for the grating setting

R/S module, Page 3/7
Setting aim: If an electric cylinder (2) is replaced, the lifting rod (1) is to be set so that it does not move up to
the limit stop.

Sequence of steps
– Turn the lifting rod (1) until the required value
A for dimension (A) is achieved.
Lifting rod
Dimension “A” 7 - 10 mm

– After installing the “M33” electric cylinder,

measure the stroke by running the test
program. The saved data will thereby be
updated.
1
82.10, Page 2/74

– After installing the “M34” electric cylinder,

measure the stroke by running the test
2 program. The saved data will thereby be
updated.
82.11, Page 2/75

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 6 / 73

Description of machine subassemblies
Delivery section

7.7.5.3 Setting the waste transport flap

R/S module, Page 3/7
WARNING
Set the main switch to the “off” position and secure it with a lock.

1 2

If the flap (2) strikes against the end stop (3), then the setting for the flap (2) will have to be corrected.
The flap (2) must seal the waste chamber at the waste extractor.

Preparatory work
– Screw in all bolts for the end-position dampers (4) completely (clockwise rotation). The end-position
dampers are now set for maximum damping.

– Set the pressure at the regulating valve (1) to 1.8 bar.

6 / 74 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Description of machine subassemblies
 Delivery section

Exhaust-air throttles settings (standard setting)

– Set both throttles (9) to (X).

X
Restriction settings (standard setting)
X

Dimension X 5.00 mm

– Prerequisite: The prescribe pressure of 1.8

bar is set.
9
Activate the flap (2) using the manual emer-
gency override (6).

– Unless the flap (2) moves to the correspond-

ing end position, unscrew the relevant screw a
little.

Flap settings (standard setting)

– Using the manual override (6) at the solenoid
valve, activate the flap (2).
3 – Loosen the nut (8) at the fork head.

– By twisting the piston rod (7), set a small gap

7 between the flap (2) and the stop (3).
8
2

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 6 / 75

Description of machine subassemblies
Delivery section

End-position dampers settings (standard setting)

– Set screws (10) and (11) for the end-position
dampers in accordance with specifications.
+
End-position dampers settings (standard
setting)
End-position damper (10) Screw in, and
11 10 then unscrew by 3
turns.
2
End-position damper (11) Screw in, and
then unscrew by
2.5 turns.

– With the aid of the manual emergency override

6
(6) at the solenoid valve, move to both end po-
sitions.
– The flap (2) must gently move against both
end points.

– The dampening effect needs to be increased,

if the flap (2) strikes against the end-position
dampers causing audible noise. Tighten the
screw (10) or (11) (+).

6 / 76 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Description of machine subassemblies
 Control technique

8 Control technique
8.1 Basic module of the control system
8.1.1 Description
Structure
The control system includes the following
4 8 interfaces and modules:
1: Battery compartment
5 2: PCMCIA slot
3
6 3: 6 status LEDs
4: CAN interface
9
5: RS232 interface
1
2 6: Ethernet interface
7: Digital inputs and outputs
8 : 24 V DC power supply
7 9 : Expansion slots for additional IO modules

Purpose: Control system for the machine

The machine control system (1) contains the program for the operating unit(2) as well as for the control sys-
tem of the machine.
Controls all machine functions.

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 6 / 77

Description of machine subassemblies
Control technique

Condition: Status indicator of the control sys-

tem via LEDs
The 6 LEDs indicate the various possible states of
the control system.

1 flashes yellow when data is being trans-

mitted from or to the CAN controller
2 lights up red in service mode
3 lights up yellow when programming the
Flash-PROM
4 flashes yellow when data is being re-
ceived or sent at the RS232 interface
5 lights up green in RUN and Service
modes
6 lights up yellow in service mode

6 / 78 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Description of machine subassemblies
 Control technique

8.1.2 Carrying out a cold start

Working with the BuR basic module, Page 3/10
Description Basic module of the control system, Page 6/77
A cold start will reset the control unit to its original state.
Setting aim: A cold start means that the working memory of the machine control unit is erased. The input val-
ues are reset to the default values (default settings). A cold start may become necessary, if the control unit
fails to start correctly.

Sequence of steps
– Switch off the main switch.
– Remove the cover from the control unit.
– Adjust the ROTARY switches(SW0) and
(SW1).
Switch position for cold start
SW0 F
SW1 F

– Switch on the main switch, and then switch off

again after about 20 seconds.

– Adjust the ROTARY switches(SW0) and

(SW1).
Switch positions for normal operation
SW0 1
SW1 0

– Switch on the main switch again.

The working memory of the machine
control unit is erased. The default values
(default settings) are active once more.

– The data (set-up values) must now be

re-entered.
8.1, Page 2/77

Finishing
– Re-mount the hood of the control unit.

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 6 / 79

Description of machine subassemblies
Control technique

8.1.3 Control system battery

8.1.3.1 Change battery of control system

Working with the BuR basic module, Page 3/10
Removing the battery from the control system, Page 6/80
Mounting the battery in the control system, Page 6/80

8.1.3.2 Removing the battery from the control system

Note: The data (machine settings, shift data) in the data memory are lost if the battery is changed in voltage-
free state!
Sequence of steps
– Before starting to work on electronic compon-
ents always make sure that static electricity
is discharged by touching the machine earth
cable or other ground connections. If this is not
done, the components may be destroyed.

– Use a screwdriver to remove the cover (21) of

the battery.

– Pull the pullout strip (A) and the battery (C) will
jump out of its holder.

8.1.3.3 Mounting the battery in the control system

Note: Do not grasp the battery with nippers or non-insulated pincers. Risk of short circuit.
Note: The battery may only be touched by hand on the front (C)
Note: Lithium batteries are considered to be special waste, and must therefore be disposed of in an appropri-
ate manner.
Sequence of steps
– Insert new lithium battery (B) with correct po-
larity (-+) in the battery compartment. To do so
pull the extracting strip (A) to the left and insert
the battery in the battery compartment with the
"+"-end to the right.
Note: To allow the battery to be pulled out
again later the extraction strip must (A) be on
the left of the battery.

– Put the projecting end of the strip (A) under-

neath the battery so that it does not stick out of
the battery compartment.

– Mount cover. First put the bottom end of the

cover in the opening of the battery compart-
ment. The top end snaps onto the cover with a
little pressure.

6 / 80 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Description of machine subassemblies
 Control technique

8.1.4 Compact Flash card

8.1.4.1 Software exchange between memory card and control system

Loading software, Page 3/8
Replacing the operating unit (including the control unit), Page 3/9
Working with the BuR basic module, Page 3/10
Copy software from the memory card onto the control system or vice versa. A memory card (PCMCIA card) is
required with a minimum of 4 MB.

Preparatory work
– Note the positions of the two rotary switches SW0 and SW1, so that they can be reset to their original po-
sitions after copying.

– If the memory card is to be overwritten, the write-protection must be deactivated.

Switch off write protection, Page 6/83

– You will have to record/write down all the settings contained in the data screens, if the control system is
to be overwritten.

Sequence of steps
– Turn off the main switch of the machine.
– Set the rotary switches SW0 and SW1, according to the direction of the data exchange.
Rotary switch setting for software exchange
From memory card to SW0=4 and
control unit SW1=F
From control unit to SW0=2 and
memory card SW1=F

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 6 / 81

Description of machine subassemblies
Control technique

– Insert the memory card in the slot (1). Here,

the cut-out (3) in the memory card needs to
be located on the opposite side of the ejection
button (2).

Inserted correctly

The memory card is not inserted correctly unles the

ejection key (2) is out.

– Turn on the main switch again.

– Watch the status LED. The LEDs "Mode", Ready" and "Run" are lit up during the copying process.

– Wait until the RUN LED (green) and the READY LED (yellow) are flashing. Then the software update is
finished.
Note: If the ERROR LED (red) flashes, the software update was not successful. In this case, repeat the
process or contact Rieter Service.

– Turn off the main switch of the machine.

– Eject the memory card by pressing the eject key (2) and remove.

– Perform a cold start.

Carrying out a cold start, Page 6/79

– Turn on the main switch again.

– Prerequisite: If the control system has been overwritten:

Re-enter the settings in the data screens.
Note: You can see from the software version whether copying has been successful,

6 / 82 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Description of machine subassemblies
 Control technique

8.1.4.2 Switch off write protection

Working with the BuR basic module, Page 3/10
The small switch on the memory card allows the
write protection to be switched on and off.
Setting aim: If data need to be transferred to the
memory card the write-protection must be switched
off.
Protective writing
No Position (R) = "read"
off Position (W) = "write"

8.1.5 Ethernet interface 3IF of the control system

8.1.5.1 Setting the IP address

Replacing the operating unit (including the control unit), Page 3/9
Working with the BuR basic module, Page 3/10
The IP address is the communication address in
x1 the Ethernet system.
x16 The final two digits of the IP address are variable,
and must be set at the (x16) and (x1) switches.
Setting aim: Each machine in the Ethernet network
must be assigned an unambiguous IP address.
Interface to external system SPIDERweb

Setting the IP address

– Turn off the main switch of the machine.
– Turn the two ROTARY switches to set the final
two digits. Example: set the decimal number
“21” for the IP address 172.27.10.21.
Note: Set (x16) rotary switch position to “1”
and (x1) rotary switch position to “5” (since the
hexadecimal number “15” is equivalent to the
decimal number “21”).
ROTARY switch
x1 Last digit
x16 Second-last digit

– Turn on the main switch again.

– Check the IP address in the following data

screen.
Data mask 30.1

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 6 / 83

Description of machine subassemblies
Control technique

8.2 Frequency converter

8.2.1 Identifying the frequency converter
Replace the frequency converter, Page 3/10
The Rieter article number (1) on the attached ad-
hesive label (E) has to agree with the article num-
ber of the respective device in the electrical docu-
mentation. The model designation (2) has to agree
with the designation on the manufacturer’s label (3)
on the side of the frequency converter.
3

XX0V 3 Phase x.xx kW

2 Model: xxxxxxxxxxxx
1 Rieter: xxxx xxxx
Xxxxxxxxxx

8.2.2 Regenerating the replacement frequency converter

DANGER
Even after the appliance has been disconnected from the mains, the intermediate circuit remains
live (intermediate circuit capacitor).
Failure to observe the discharge duration specification can lead to fatal injuries.
Only qualified electricians are permitted to work at the frequency converter.
A 10-minute wait period (discharge duration) is required following disconnection from the mains.
Avoid contact with any live parts.
Wait until the LED (CHARGE) is no longer lit. Then wait a further 5 minutes.
Check the voltage for the intermediate circuit. The voltage has to have dropped to below 30
volts.

The replacement frequency converters held in storage must be connected to a mains supply for at least one
hour every six months. This allows the internal component to regenerate themselves.
Setting aim: The replacement equipment can be put into service at any time.

Sequence of steps
– Remove the frequency converter.
Removing the frequency converter, Page 6/86

– Install the frequency converter.

Installing the frequency converter, Page 6/88

6 / 84 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Description of machine subassemblies
 Control technique

8.2.3 Frequency converter

8.2.3.1 Description
Structure
The frequency converter series contains models
with differing designs. These differ in size and form
4 according to the design. The main components of
each version are nevertheless the same.
2
1 Power unit
2 Operating unit
3 Option board
4 Retaining screws

1 3 5 Cable duct

8.2.3.2 Replacing the frequency converter

Removing the frequency converter, Page 6/86
Installing the frequency converter, Page 6/88

Note: Frequency converters are subject to natural aging effects. Frequency converters are to be replaced
at regular intervals with inspected replacement equipment. Doing so effectively prevents equipment failure.
Authorized RIETER Service Personnel only may service frequency converters. For replacement equipment /
service: Please contact your nearest RIETER Service Center or RIETER Parts.

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 6 / 85

Description of machine subassemblies
Control technique

8.2.3.3 Removing the frequency converter

WARNING
When the main switch is set to the "on" position, elements downstream of the main switch are
live.
Injury due to electric shock.
Prior to commencing electrical installation work, switch off the machine via the main switch and
secure the switch with a padlock.

Description Frequency converter, Page 6/85

Note: The actual appearance of the housing to be removed may differ from the illustration.
Removing the cover from the power unit

1 4

3 3
2

– Loosen the screw (1) and remove the cover (2).

– Press the pawls (4) of the cover (3) inwards.

– Remove the cover (3) in the direction of the arrow.

6 / 86 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Description of machine subassemblies
 Control technique

– Carefully press the detention pawls (6) on both

sides of the module (5) inwards.
The pawls (6) are released from the
recesses (7).

– Remove the module (5).

6
7

6 7
5

Reading data off the charge indicator

DANGER
Even after the appliance has been disconnected from the mains, the intermediate circuit remains
live (intermediate circuit capacitor).
Failure to observe the discharge duration specification can lead to fatal injuries.
Only qualified electricians are permitted to work at the frequency converter.
A 10-minute wait period (discharge duration) is required following disconnection from the mains.
Avoid contact with any live parts.
Wait until the LED (CHARGE) is no longer lit. Then wait a further 5 minutes.
Check the voltage for the intermediate circuit. The voltage has to have dropped to below 30
volts.
– Check whether or not the (CHARGE) LED lights up.
The LED will light up if the voltage for the intermediate circuit still exceeds 50 VDC.

– Wait until the (CHARGE) LED has gone out.

– After the (CHARGE) LED has gone out, wait a

further 5 minutes.
– Measure the residual voltage between the ter-
minals with the designations (-) and (+1) (inter-
mediate circuit).
Note: The positioning of these terminals within
the power block is dependent on the design.

8 – As soon as the residual voltage for the inter-

CHARGE

mediate circuit has dropped to below 30 VDC,

disconnect the cables.

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 6 / 87

Description of machine subassemblies
Control technique

Disconnecting the cables

– Check the markings on the terminals and cables. Ensure that the cables are connected correctly during
re-installation.
– Disconnect the power and control terminals.

– Disconnect the earth terminals.

– Do not pull the cables out of the cable ducts.
Note: The cable ducts remain in the electrical control cabinet of the machine while the frequency con-
verter is being replaced.

– Loosen the four retaining screws and remove the frequency converter.

8.2.3.4 Installing the frequency converter

WARNING
When the main switch is set to the "on" position, elements downstream of the main switch are
live.
Injury due to electric shock.
Prior to commencing electrical installation work, switch off the machine via the main switch and
secure the switch with a padlock.

Identifying the frequency converter

– Prior to installation, check that the device is available.
Identifying the frequency converter, Page 6/84

– Equip the device appropriately.

Equipping the frequency converter, Page 6/89

– Configure the device for use with the machine.

Configuring the frequency converter, Page 6/90

– Install the device, applying the same steps used for removal, but in reverse order.

Connecting cables
– Apply the same steps used for removal, but in reverse order.

– Connect the control, power and earth cables according to their designations.
Note: Pay attention to the electric documentation.

– Pay attention to the specifications concerning the connection of the earth cable.
Equipping the frequency converter, Page 6/89

6 / 88 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Description of machine subassemblies
 Control technique

8.2.3.5 Equipping the frequency converter

Replace the frequency converter, Page 3/10
The device has to be equipped according to its design.

CAN module (SI-S3/V)

1
2
3
4 5
7

2 3
4 6

– Gently press the detention pawls (2) on both sides of the module (1)inwards.

– Press on the module (1) until the pawls (2) lock into place in the recesses (3)

Connecting the earth cable of the CAN module

– Prerequisite: For all variants, the earth cable (4) running from the CAN module to the frequency con-
verter has to be kept as short as possible.
Attach the earth cable (4) to the earth terminal (5) of the CAN module.

– Attach the earth cable (4) to the earth terminal (6) of the frequency converter.
Note: For all variants, the earth cable has to be run in such a way that any covers can be closed cor-
rectly.

– Insert the connector (7) of the CAN bus cable.

– Fit the covers (8)

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 6 / 89

Description of machine subassemblies
Control technique

8.2.3.6 Configuring the frequency converter

Replace the frequency converter, Page 3/10
DANGER
Even after the appliance has been disconnected from the mains, the intermediate circuit remains
live (intermediate circuit capacitor).
Failure to observe the discharge duration specification can lead to fatal injuries.
Only qualified electricians are permitted to work at the frequency converter.
A 10-minute wait period (discharge duration) is required following disconnection from the mains.
Avoid contact with any live parts.
Wait until the LED (CHARGE) is no longer lit. Then wait a further 5 minutes.
Check the voltage for the intermediate circuit. The voltage has to have dropped to below 30
volts.

The frequency converter is configured using the

Off On V I (S1...S4) switches on the control card.

S2 S1
AI PTC
S4

SINK (NPN)
S3

SOURCE (PNP)

Setting the S1, S2, S3 DIP switches

– Set the S1 switch.
S1 switch position:
U21 frequency converter I
U22 frequency converter I
U23 frequency converter. I
U31 frequency converter I
U32 frequency converter I
U37 frequency converter I

6 / 90 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Description of machine subassemblies
 Control technique

– Set the S2 switch.

S2 switch position:
U21 frequency converter On
U22 frequency converter On
U23 frequency converter. On
U31 frequency converter On
U32 frequency converter On
U37 frequency converter On

– Set the S3 switch. (Digital inputs of the frequency converter.)

S3 switch position:
U21 frequency converter SINK (NPN)
U22 frequency converter SINK (NPN)
U23 frequency converter. SINK (NPN)
U31 frequency converter SINK (NPN)
U32 frequency converter SINK (NPN)
U37 frequency converter SINK (NPN)

– Set the S4 switch.

S4 switch position:
U21 frequency converter AI
U22 frequency converter AI
U23 frequency converter AI
U31 frequency converter AI
U32 frequency converter AI
U37 frequency converter AI

8.2.3.7 Adapting to the cooling system

Replace the frequency converter, Page 3/10
Adapt the frequency converter to the cooling system used in the machine.

Heat transfer plate

– Use a spatula to remove old heat transfer compound residue from the heat transfer plates.
Note: Use solvent to remove any remaining traces of residue.

– Check whether or not the transfer plate is damaged. Carefully file off or grind off any local unevenness.

– Prerequisite: Before installing the device:

Coat the heat transfer plate with heat transfer compound, applying it uniformly and across the entire sur-
face.
Note: Use a paint roller instead of a brush.
Requirements for the heat transfer compound
Composition Silicone-free
Thermal conductivity 0.9 - 1.0 W/mK

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 6 / 91

Description of machine subassemblies
Control technique

8.2.3.8 Setting the T1000V frequency converter

Replace the frequency converter, Page 3/10

ALM REV
1 DRV FOUT
6
LO
ESC
RE

2 RESET ENTER 5
RUN STOP

3 4

Whenever the frequency converter is replaced, the baud and the node address have to be set.

Preparatory tasks prior to making the settings

– Prerequisite: Voltage has to be applied to the frequency converter to be set.
Switch on the machine via the main switch.

Setting authorisation (for all frequency converters)

– Press key (4) or (6) until the parameter(PAr) appears on the display (1).

– Confirm using key (5).

– The parameter (A1-01) flashes on the display (1).

– Press key (5) several times until the display indicates the parameter value.

– Use key (2) to move from one digit to the next and keys (4) and (6) to adjust the value («0002»).

– Confirm using key (5).

Note: («End») lights up briefly, followed by the set value («0002») and finally (A1-01).
The authorisation for changing any parameter value has now been set up.

Initialisation (for all frequency converters)

– Prerequisite: Authorisation has been set up and (A1-02) is being flashed on the display.
Use key (6) to increase the final digit of the display (1) to («3»).

– Confirm using key (5).

– Using keys (2) (4) and (6), enter the value («2220»).

– Confirm using key (5).

Note: Once initialisation is complete, (A1-03) appears again.

Communication parameter: Select the “Do not initialise” setting

– Prerequisite: Authorisation has been set up and (A1-02) is being flashed on the display.
Use key (2) to move to letter (A) on the display (1).

– Use key (6) to change the (A) to an (F).

– Use key (2) to select the parameter (F6-08).

6 / 92 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Description of machine subassemblies
 Control technique

– Confirm using key (5).

– Use key (2) to select the final digit.

– Use keys (4) and (6) to set the value («00»).

– Confirm using key (5).

Setting the baud

– Prerequisite: Authorisation has been set up and (A1-02) is being flashed on the display.
Use key (2) to move to letter (A) on the display (1).

– Use key (6) to change the (A) to an (F).

– Use key (2) to select the parameter (F6-36).

– Confirm using key (5).

– Use key (2) to select the final digit.

– Using keys (4) and (6), set the («0»).

Note: With the value set to («0»), the search for the baud occurs automatically..

– Confirm using key (5).

Setting the node address (dependent on the frequency converter selected)

– Prerequisite: Determine the node address of the respective frequency converter from the electrical cir-
cuit diagram. Authorisation has been set up and (A1-02) is being flashed on the display.
Use key (2) to move to letter (A) on the display (1).

– Use key (6) to change the (A) to an (F).

– Use key (2) to select the parameter (F6-35).

– Confirm using key (5).

– Use key (2) to select the final digit.

– Using keys (4) and (6), set the node address.

Note: The node address is indicated in the relevant data screen.
30.6, Page 2/63

– Confirm using key (5).

Finishing
– After the settings have been made, select “Automatic mode” in data screen 80.1.
The machine prepares for operation. “Ready for operation” appears on the status line.

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 6 / 93

Description of machine subassemblies
Control technique

8.3 Bus systems

8.3.1 Terminating resistor for CAN bus

8.3.1.1 Setting or wiring in the terminating resistors for the CAN-Bus.

Replacing the operating unit (including the control unit), Page 3/9

Setting aim: A terminating resistor must be present at the first and last connection so that the CAN-Bus can
function correctly.

Setting the terminator at the sub-D connector

– The switch on a D-Sub plug (1) must be set on "ON".

Wire the terminator.

– On the A20 module, a bridge (2) to the “Term” terminals must be fitted.

Finishing
– Check that a terminating resistor has only been wired in on the first and last connection.

6 / 94 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Description of machine subassemblies
 Control technique

8.4 External I/O card

8.4.1 CAN IO module CX408

8.4.1.1 Checking CAN I/O module CX408

Use the LEDs to test the CAN I/O modules CX408 and their inputs and outputs
You can use the 16 LEDs to test the status of the inputs and outputs.
– The 16 LEDs indicate the state of either the
inputs or the outputs. Use the switch (1) to
change over the LEDs. If LED (3) lights up
green, the 16 LEDs are indicating the state of
the inputs. If LED (3) lights up yellow, the 16
LEDs are indicating the state of the outputs.

– Use LED (2) to check whether the module is

working properly during operation.

– If the LED is green, the module is working

properly.

– If the LED flashes yellow, the supply voltage of

the outputs is incorrect.

– If the LED lights up yellow, the outputs are de-

fective.

Action
Check of the LED indicates a fault.
– Possibly replace module or feed and check the wiring.

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 6 / 95

Description of machine subassemblies
Control technique

8.4.1.2 Set the CAN node address of the CAN I/O module CX408
Replacing the operating unit (including the control unit), Page 3/9
CAN node module, Page 3/10
Via two rotary switches an address specified by Rieter is set on each module on the CAN bus.

Sequence of steps
– Set the rotary switch (SW0) and (SW1).
Note: The following correct setting is import-
ant, otherwise the connection to the control
system will not work.
Addresses for A20 CAN nodes
SW0 2
SW1 4

6 / 96 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Description of machine subassemblies
 Operating and display elements

9 Operating and display elements

9.1 Operator panel
9.1.1 Description
Structure
The operator panel (1) and the machine control
system (20) form a unit.

20

Purpose: Operator panel

The controls and displays on the operator panel (1) enable functions to be carried out, input and queries to be
made.

Purpose: Machine control system

The machine control system (20) contains the program for the operator panel (1) as well as for the controller
of the machine.
Controls all machine functions.

9.1.2 Inserting the modules and plugs on the operator panel

Replacing the operating unit (including the control unit), Page 3/9
Description Operator panel, Page 6/97
The modules and plugs have to be inserted accord-
ing to the electric manual.
24
Setting aim: Equipping the control system specific-
ally for the machine.

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 6 / 97

Description of machine subassemblies
Operating and display elements

9.1.3 Adjusting the contrast on the display unit

Replacing the operating unit (including the control unit), Page 3/9
The brightness of the display needs adjusting depending on the lighting. If the setting is wrong black stripes
will be visible.

Sequence of steps
– Prerequisite: The overview (basic screen or
malfunction) is displayed.
Hold the "BASIC-DISPLAY-key" (1)
down. Simultaneously press the
"DATA-DISPLAY-key-backward (2)". The
screen gets darker..

– Hold the "BASIC-DISPLAY-key" (1) down.

Simultaneously press the "DATA-
DISPLAY-key-forward (3)". The screen gets
lighter.

6 / 98 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Description of machine subassemblies
 Operating and display elements

9.1.4 Key strip of the operator panel

9.1.4.1 Change keyboard strip

Replacing the operating unit (including the control unit), Page 3/9
Pull out the keyboard strip, Page 6/99
Insert keyboard strip, Page 6/99

9.1.4.2 Pull out the keyboard strip

Sequence of steps
– Loosen the nuts on the circumference of the
operator panel.

– Pull out the keyboard strip (T).

– Tighten the nuts on the circumference of the

operator panel again.

9.1.4.3 Insert keyboard strip

Sequence of steps
– Undo the nuts on the circumference of the op-
erator panel.

– Insert keyboard strip (T)

– Tighten the nuts on the circumference of the

operator panel again.

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 6 / 99

Description of machine subassemblies
Operating and display elements

6 / 100 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Description of machine subassemblies
 Torque standard

10 Torque standard
Screw dimension Strength class torque Clamping strength
M4 8.8 3.1 Nm 3.9 kN
10.9 4.5 Nm 5.7 kN
12.9 5.3 Nm 6.7 kN
M5 8.8 6.1 Nm 6.4 kN
10.9 8.9 Nm 8.3 kN
12.9 10.4 Nm 10.9 kN
M6 8.8 10.4 Nm 9.0 kN
10.9 15.5 Nm 13.2 kN
12.9 18.0 Nm 15.4 kN
M8 8.8 25.0 Nm 16.5 kN
10.9 37.0 Nm 24.2 kN
12.9 43.0 Nm 28.5 kN
M10 8.8 51.0 Nm 26.0 kN
10.9 75.0 Nm 38.5 kN
12.9 87.0 Nm 45.0 kN
M12 8.8 87.0 Nm 38.5 kN
10.9 130.0 Nm 56.0 kN
12.9 150.0 Nm 66.0 kN
M16 8.8 215.0 Nm 72.0 kN
10.9 310.0 Nm 106.0 kN
12.9 370.0 Nm 124.0 kN
M20 8.8 430.0 Nm 117.0 kN
10.9 620.0 Nm 166.0 kN
12.9 720.0 Nm 194.0 kN
M24 8.8 740.0 Nm 168.0 kN
10.9 1080.0 Nm 239.0 kN
12.9 1240.0 Nm 280.0 kN

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 6 / 101

Description of machine subassemblies
Torque standard

6 / 102 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Description of machine subassemblies
 Keyword index

Keyword index
Page

A
Accident Prevention 3/11
Actual values for feed module 2/52, 2/62
Actual values for mixer 2/52, 2/62
Adapting to the cooling system 6/91
Adjust the pressure sensor 6/25
Adjust the separating vanes 6/27
Adjust the stripper rake 6/31
Adjusting the contrast on the display unit 6/98
Adjusting the distance between the conveyor belt 6/21
and the spiked lattice (standard setting)
Adjusting the distance between the feed and open- 6/64
ing rollers
Adjusting the grating (waste volume rate) 6/70
Air conditions 3/3
Air ratio 1/30, 6/11
Aligning the conveyor belt 6/20
ALM LED, frequency converter 2/17

B
BASIC display key 2/13
Basic module 3/10
Browsing in the same masks 2/34
Browsing lists 2/35

C
Cancelling the password authorisation 2/32
Carrying out a cold start 6/79
Change of lubricant in gear motors (R/S module) 4/9, 4/19
Change the language 2/28
Changing from standard time to summer time 2/36
Changing lubricant for gear motors 4/8, 4/17
Changing passwords 2/31
Changing values/settings in data screens 2/35
Check settings 3/3
Checking CAN I/O module CX408 6/95
Checking slide elements 4/7, 6/35
Clean the separating vanes 4/7, 4/14
Cleaning the collecting duct 4/7, 4/12
Cleaning the housing of the frequency converter 4/7, 4/16
Clearing of blockages and rectification of machine 2/27
deficiencies.
Closing the e-DOC program 1/37, 2/50

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 7/1

Keyword index
Keyword index

Page

Cold start procedure 2/77

Compression rollers 3/7
Configuration 3/9, 3/10
Configurations 2/52, 2/69
Configuring the frequency converter 6/90
Controlling and tightening toothed belts 6/68
Conveyor belt is not running properly 3/4
Conveyor belt, M21 2/53, 2/72
CPU status, display on the basic module of the 2/20
control unit
Current maintenance warnings 2/52, 2/64
Current malfunctions 2/52, 2/64
Current warnings 2/52, 2/64

D
Data display, frequency converter 2/16
DATA-DISPLAY-key-back 2/13
DATA-DISPLAY-key-forward 2/13
Date / times 2/52, 2/66
DELETE key 2/12
Delete protocols / statistics 2/52, 2/65
Differential pressure switch 3/8, 6/52
DIRECT key, forward 2/9
DIRECT-key back 2/10
Dismantling 3/11
Display additional help for troubleshooting 2/29
Display brightness 3/9
Display main mask 2/34
Display the last data screen again 2/33
Displaying an individual data screen 2/33
Distance of the Take-off Roller to the Spike Lattice 6/48
Distribution cylinder, Y1 2/53, 2/75
Down arrow key, frequency converter 2/17
Drive unit for spiked lattice 6/38
DRV LED, frequency converter 2/18

E
Efficiency 2/52, 2/60
Electric cylinder for the grating setting 6/73
Electric Travel cylinder M25 2/53, 2/73
Electric Travel cylinder M33 2/53, 2/74
Electric Travel cylinder M34 2/53, 2/75
Electrical data 1/31
EMERGENCY SHUT-DOWN button 2/9

7/2 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Keyword index
 Keyword index

Page

Emptying the machine 2/24

Emptying the machine (R/S module attached) 2/26
END OF LIST key 2/11
Endurance test 2/53, 2/76
Engaging the emergency stop 2/22
ENTER key, frequency converter 2/17
Enter password 2/30
ENTER-key 2/9, 2/12
Entering ordering address in e-DOC 1/37, 2/41
Entering recipient’s address in e-DOC 1/37, 2/41
Entering the fault code in e-DOC 1/37, 2/49
Equipment 3/10
Equipping the frequency converter 6/89
ESC key, frequency converter 2/16
Event statistics 2/52, 2/65
Events occurred 2/52, 2/65
Example of a message display 2/54
Example of an order in e-DOC 1/37, 2/46
Exhaust air 3/5, 6/28

F
Fastening guide rails 6/36
Feed rollers 3/7
Filling in the e-DOC order form 1/37, 2/45
FOUT LED, frequency converter 2/18
Frequency converter 2/52, 2/63

G
Grating 3/7

H
HELP-key 2/10
How to acknowledge a malfunction. 2/28

I
Identifying the frequency converter 6/84
Input overview 2/52, 2/63
Inputs 2/53, 2/71
Insert keyboard strip 6/99
Inserting the modules and plugs on the operator 6/97
panel
Inspect and clean storage area and rollers. 4/7, 4/13
Install spike lattice 6/42
Install the spiked lattice 6/34
Installation, adding equipment 3/9

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 7/3

Keyword index
Keyword index

Page

Installing opening roller 6/67

Installing the compression roller 6/56
Installing the conveyor belt 6/16
Installing the feed roller 6/61
Installing the frequency converter 6/88
Irregular material layers. 3/4

L
LANGUAGE-key 2/14
Languages 2/52, 2/66
LED "Alert" 2/19
LED automatic mode (production mode) 2/19
LED call "Service personnel" 2/20
LED electric power supply 2/19
LED "Malfunction" 2/20
LED "status" on module CX408 does not light up 5/19
green
Light barriers 6/50
LO-RE-LED, frequency converter 2/17
LOCAL/REMOTE key, frequency converter 2/17
Lubricating bearings and chains 4/7, 4/15
Lubricating chains (R/S module) 4/9, 4/18

M
Machine functions 2/52, 2/61
Machine information 2/52, 2/61
Machine key "destress" 2/15
Main switch 2/8
Making e-DOC settings 1/37, 2/40
Making fill height and fill quantity settings for the 6/29
dynamic storage unit
Malfunctions in filling and emptying of the machine 3/4
Material feed for the module 3/6
Material height 3/6
Measures to be taken 3/11
MENU overview key 2/10
MENU-key back 2/13
MENU-key forwards 2/13
MINUS-ENTER-key 2/11
MINUS-key 2/10
Mote-knife settings for the R/S module: 1/26
Mounting the battery in the control system 6/80

N
Navigating through e-DOC 1/37, 2/38

7/4 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Keyword index
 Keyword index

Page

Navigating through lower-level sub-assemblies in 1/37, 2/43

e-DOC
Navigating through the e-DOC operating manual 1/37, 2/47, 2/48
Navigating through the e-DOC spare parts cata- 1/37, 2/43
logue
Navigating to a desired data screen with one key 2/33

O
Opening e-DOC 1/37, 2/39
Opening roller 3/7
Opening roller of the R/S module: 1/26
Opening secured windows 3/4
Opening the e-DOC operating manual 1/37, 2/48
Opening the e-DOC order form for spare parts 1/37, 2/49
Opening the e-DOC overview screen 1/37, 2/42
Opening the e-DOC spare parts catalogue 1/37, 2/42
Opening the e-DOC troubleshooting information 1/37, 2/48
page
Opening the home page of the e-DOC program 1/37, 2/39
Operating Materials 3/11
Outputs 2/53, 2/71
Outputs: 2/52, 2/63
Overview screen for UNImix with R/S module 2/55

P
Password change level 2 2/78
Password change Master 2/78
Password entry 2/78
PASSWORD-CANCELLING key 2/11
PASSWORD-INSERT key 2/11
Performing service functions 2/37
PLUS-ENTER-key 2/11
PLUS-key 2/11
POINTER key back 2/9
POINTER key forward 2/10
Position of the opening roller to the spiked lattice 6/43
(standard setting)
Positioning the ball bearing races for the take-off 6/47
roller
Proximity switch for ascertaining the speed of the 6/69
opening roller
Pull out the keyboard strip 6/99
Push-button and LED test 2/53, 2/76

R
Rectifying faults in e-DOC 1/37, 2/49

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 7/5

Keyword index
Keyword index

Page

Rectifying machine deficiencies. 2/24

Regenerating the replacement frequency converter 4/8, 6/84
Removal 3/9
Remove the spike lattice. 6/41
Remove the spiked lattice. 6/32
Removing feed roller 6/59
Removing the battery from the control system 6/80
Removing the compression roller 6/53
Removing the conveyor belt 6/14
Removing the frequency converter 6/86
Removing the opening roller 6/65
Removing the windows 6/9
RESET key, frequency converter 2/16
Resetting the EMERGENCY STOP button 2/22
REV LED, frequency converter 2/18
RUN key, frequency converter 2/16
RUN LED, frequency converter 2/16

S
Saving the shopping basket information in e-DOC 1/37, 2/45
SCREEN-key back 2/12
SCREEN-key scroll forwards 2/12
Searching for handling instructions in the e-DOC 1/37, 2/47
operating manual
Selecting spare parts for sub-assemblies in e-DOC 1/37, 2/44
Selecting the language for e-DOC 1/37, 2/39
Sensor testing and display of I/O status via signal 2/36
lamp
Set the CAN node address of the CAN I/O module 6/96
CX408
Set-up values for feed module 2/52, 2/68
Setting or wiring in the terminating resistors for the 6/94
CAN-Bus.
Setting suction values 6/10
Setting the brightness of the display 2/38
Setting the cleaning unit for the conveyor belt 6/18
Setting the distributor flap 6/24
Setting the feed chute walls 6/51
Setting the IP address 6/83
Setting the T1000V frequency converter 6/92
Setting the waste transport flap 6/74
Settings 2/52, 2/58, 2/59, 3/5
Setup values for mixer 2/52, 2/67
Setup values pressure 2/52, 2/67

7/6 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Keyword index
 Keyword index

Page

Software 3/8
Software exchange between memory card and 6/81
control system
Spike lattice 3/6
Spike(s) of lattice 3/6
Standard mechanical configuration 3/3
START key on the operator panel 2/14
START OF LIST key 2/10
Starting the machine 2/23, 2/25
STOP key on the operator panel 2/14
STOP key, frequency converter 2/17
Stop machine 2/23, 2/25
Stop production 6/44
Storage bin not adequately filled 3/3
Switch OFF the main switch and secure 2/21
Switch off write protection 6/83
Switch operating mode 2/52, 2/70
Switch settings 3/10
Switching from the spare parts catalogue to the op- 1/37, 2/46
erating manual in e-DOC
Switching off the main switch. 2/21
Switching on main switch Q10 2/21

T
Take-off roller 3/6
Take-off roller, M24 2/53, 2/73
Tension conveyor belt 4/7, 6/19
Tension the spike lattice 4/7, 6/37
Tighten chain 6/63
Tighten the toothed belt drive of spiked lattice 6/39
Tighten the V-belt 4/7, 6/46, 6/49
Tightening the chain 4/7, 6/22

U
UNImix B 72 / B 76 with R/S module (optionally 2/57
with foreign fibre separator, as well)
UNImix B 72 with R/S module and active bypassing 2/57
Up arrow key, frequency converter 2/18
Use the LEDs to test the CAN I/O modules CX408 6/95
and their inputs and outputs

V
Visually checking the slide elements 6/35

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 7/7

Keyword index
Keyword index

Page

W
What do you do if you have forgotten the master 2/32
password?
Working with parts of the basic module 3/10

“
“Empty machine” machine button 2/14
“Empty R/S module” machine button 2/15
“Filling” the e-DOC shopping basket 1/37, 2/50

7/8 UNImix B 76 20.02.2014 - en - V2.1

Keyword index
 Appendix

Appendix
*** ERROR (Appendix): Appendix not implemented!

20.02.2014 - en - V2.1 UNImix B 76 8/1

Appendix